JP6804759B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine, when a game ball enters the first start port, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed. In the variable display of the first special symbol, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result after the variable display of the first special symbol, a special game accompanied by opening the big winning opening is executed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the winning gate, a variable display of a normal symbol is performed. In the variable display of the normal symbol, when the hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result after the variable display of the normal symbol, the auxiliary game accompanied by the opening of the variable second starting port, which is the starting port, is executed.

Here, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the special symbol lottery effect including the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the display area of the image display device 7. Will be done. Then, for example, if the variable display of the normal symbol is started while the special figure lottery effect is being performed, the normal pattern effect may be started. The normal drawing effect is performed together with the special drawing lottery effect in the display area of the image display device 7. In the normal drawing effect, when a specific symbol is stopped as a result of the normal drawing effect, an auxiliary game with a long opening time of the second starting port is executed. During this auxiliary game, a long opening effect is performed together with a special drawing lottery effect in the display area of the image display device 7. The long opening effect is a long opening notice effect that announces the long opening before the long opening of the second starting port is performed, and a long opening effect is being performed between the long opening and the end of the auxiliary game. It is composed of a long open production that suggests that there is something. In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting port during this auxiliary game, the second special figure holding effect suggesting that the ball has entered the second starting port and the entry into the second starting port are performed. Each of the long-opening middle-winning productions, which represents the number of prize balls for each ball, is performed separately from the long-opening production. Then, when the long opening effect is completed with the end of the auxiliary game, a special effect with a background image different from the previous one is performed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-139535

However, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game with respect to the game machine capable of performing the auxiliary game accompanied by the opening of the variable starting area such as the second starting port as described above.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, the problem is to provide a new game machine that enhances the game entertainment.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention
A first starting area and a second starting area that can be in a closed state and an open state are provided.
The variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first starting area, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the second starting area. Game control means to play
A gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal state and a specific state in which the second starting region is more likely to take the open state than the normal state.
A gaming machine equipped with an effect control means capable of executing a predetermined effect.
The game control means executes variable display of a normal symbol when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when a specific display result is derived from the variable display of the normal symbol, the auxiliary with the open state of the second starting region. Playing a game
The effect control means
A predetermined effect can be executed on condition that the game ball passes through the second starting region when the auxiliary game is being executed.
In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the second starting region while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, a special effect different from the predetermined effect is executed according to the passage. When the game ball passes through the second starting region when the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed while the predetermined effect is executed after the special effect is completed, the predetermined effect is executed according to the passage. the execution,
In the specific state, even if the game ball passes through the second starting region while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the special effect is not executed according to the passage. To do.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows in detail the 2nd prize winning apparatus and the like provided in the game machine. It is a perspective view which shows the vertical cross-sectional view of the unit component provided with the 1st prize-winning apparatus provided in the game machine, and the start winning-winning unit. It is a front view of the display equipment provided in the game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of the game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the sub-control board side of the game machine. (A) is a table showing random numbers related to ordinary figures, and (B) is a table showing random numbers related to special figures. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a hit symbol type determination table, (C) is a normal figure variation pattern determination table, and (D) is an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot symbol type determination table, (C) is a small hit symbol type determination table, and (D) is a reach determination table. Special figure 1 It is a fluctuation pattern determination table. Special figure 2 is a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a special figure confirmation time judgment table. Start winning command specific table. This is a special game control table. It is a time saving specified number of times judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the background image for a normal effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the special figure variation effect of the loss without reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the concrete example from the start of a special figure variation effect to the reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the case where the stop display of the effect symbol which shows a loss is performed from N reach, and the case where the stop display of an effect symbol which shows a big hit is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example which branches from N reach to L reach or SP reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the hold production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pending change notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pending change notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pending change notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the main production flow such as a precursor effect, a challenge effect to V, and a connection effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the concrete example of the precursor effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example which branches at the time of entering the challenge effect to V from the precursor effect and the case of not entering. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example which branches when the first challenge in the first challenge production succeeds and fails. A specific example of branching when there is a prize in the electric chew and the joint effect is performed during the auxiliary game after the electric chew launch promotion effect, and when there is no prize in the electric chew and the electric chew non-winning effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows. Special Figure 1 It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the connecting effect and the last challenge effect during change. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example which branches when the last challenge in the last challenge production succeeds and fails. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the VAT launch promotion effect and the small hit game rush effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example which branches when the temporary stop display and stop display of the effect symbol which shows the loss is performed, and when the resurrection challenge effect is performed after failure in the last challenge effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the precursor effect of the type different from the precursor effect of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the continuation of the precursor effect of FIG. 34. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the regulation of a precursor effect. It is a time chart which shows a concrete example explaining a precursor effect, a challenge effect to V, and a connection effect. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing on the main side. It is a flowchart of a sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the sensor detection process, and is the figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 40. It is a flowchart of the sensor detection process, and is the figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 41. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of ordinary symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of auxiliary game control processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of the fluctuation pattern determination process. It is a flowchart of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a jackpot game control process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of a small hit game control process. It is a flowchart of the distribution device control process. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis processing, and is the figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 59. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis processing, and is the figure which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a flowchart of the start winning process. It is a flowchart of the special figure variation effect start processing. It is a flowchart of a precursor effect Gase execution determination process. It is a flowchart of hold icon shift processing. It is a flowchart of a precursor effect regulation processing. It is a flowchart of the reduction screen display end determination processing. It is a flowchart of a normal figure fluctuation effect determination process. It is a flowchart of the auxiliary game start processing. It is a flowchart of the processing at the end of an auxiliary game. It is a flowchart of the precursor effect regulation release determination process. This is a pending change notice judgment table when the preliminary judgment result is a jackpot fluctuation. This is a pending change notice judgment table when the preliminary judgment result is a small hit fluctuation. This is a pending change notice determination table when the preliminary determination result is SP reach loss fluctuation. This is a pending change notice determination table when the preliminary determination result is L reach loss fluctuation. This is a pending change notice determination table when the preliminary determination result is N reach loss fluctuation. This is a pending change notice judgment table when the preliminary judgment result is a normal loss fluctuation. This is a special figure variation effect pattern determination table for special figure 2 variation display in the normal effect mode. It is a precursor production gasse execution judgment table. It is a pending change notice type judgment table. This is a table for determining the execution of a change sign effect. It is a precursor effect type judgment table. It is a first challenge production pattern judgment table.

<First Embodiment>
1. 1. Structure of Game Machine The pachinko game machine 1, which is the first embodiment of the game machine of the present invention, will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following description, the horizontal and vertical directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the horizontal and vertical directions (front view) for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the front direction of each part of the pachinko game machine 1 is the direction from the pachinko game machine 1 toward the player facing the pachinko game machine 1, and the rear direction of each part of the pachinko game machine 1 is the game facing the pachinko game machine 1. This will be described as a direction in which the person approaches the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a game board mounting frame 51 to which the game board 2 is mounted, and a front frame 53 rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 51. The front frame 53 can be opened and closed with respect to the game board mounting frame 51. A transparent glass plate (not shown) is attached to the front frame 53. When the front frame 53 is closed, the game board 2 attached to the game board mounting frame 51 and the glass plate face each other. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the game store, the player in front of the pachinko game machine 1 passes the game area 3 formed on the game board 2 through the glass plate as shown in FIG. It can be visually recognized. A transparent synthetic resin plate or the like may be used instead of the glass plate. It suffices if the gaming area 3 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

At the lower right of the front surface of the front frame 53, a handle 60 that can be rotated to launch the game ball is provided. The amount (rotation angle) at which the handle 60 is operated corresponds to the magnitude (launch intensity) of the force (amount driven by the launching device 112 described later to drive the launching motor 113) applied to the gaming ball to launch the gaming ball. It is attached. Therefore, the game ball is launched with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle 60. Further, in the lower center of the front surface of the front frame 53, a hitting ball supply plate (so-called “upper plate”) 61 for storing the game balls supplied to the handle 60 and a game ball that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 61 are stored. A surplus ball saucer (so-called “lower plate”) 62 is provided.

An effect button 63 that can be pressed downward is provided on the upper surface of the ball striking plate 61. Further, speakers 67 capable of outputting sound are provided on the left side and the right side of the upper front surface of the front frame 53, respectively. Further, a frame lamp 66 capable of emitting light is provided on the left side of the front central portion of the front frame 53.

Next, the game board 2 and the like will be described. The game board 2 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate. At the substantially center of the game board 2, a center decoration body 10 having a substantially circular ring shape in the front view is provided, in which an opening 10A having a substantially circular shape in the front view is formed.

Further, an image display device 7 capable of displaying an image is provided on the back side of the game board 2. An operable board movable body 15K is provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 7. The board movable body 15K constitutes the board movable device 15. In the first embodiment, the image display device 7 is composed of a 3D liquid crystal display. When the board movable body 15K is in the standby state (when waiting in the initial position), most of it is visibly held from the upper end portion of the opening 10A of the center decoration body 10, as shown in FIG. There is. At this time, the upper end of the display unit 7a of the image display device 7 is covered with a visible portion of the board movable body 15K. That is, the display unit 7a can be visually recognized from the portion of the opening 10A of the center decorative body 10 that is not covered by the movable panel 15K. The board movable body 15K can be lowered (moved downward) from the initial position (standby state) to a substantially center position of the display unit 7a in front view, and can be stopped at that position. In this case, the display unit 7a is covered with the board movable body 15K in a larger area than when the board movable body 15K is in the standby state.

A rail member 4 is provided on the front surface of the game board 2. A game area 3 surrounded by a rail member 4, a center decorative body 10, and the like is formed on the front surface of the game board 2. That is, the front surface of the game board 2 is divided into the game area 3 and the other areas by the rail member 4 and the center decorative body 10. The game area 3 is an area in which a game ball launched by operating the handle 60 can flow down, and is provided for playing a game with the pachinko game machine 1. In the game area 3, a large number of game nails (a large number of small white circles in the game area 3 of FIG. 1) are projected. The game nails are used to move a game ball that enters the game area 3 and flows down the game area 3 into a first start port 20, a second start port 22, a general winning opening 27, and a gate 28 (left gate 281 and right gate), which will be described later. 282), a route for appropriately guiding to the first prize opening 30, the second prize opening 32, and the like is configured.

Immediately below the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3, a first start winning device 21 having a first starting port 20 formed therein and a second starting winning device 21 having a second starting port 22 formed (so-called "electric chew"). ) 23, and a start winning device unit SU is provided. The first start winning device 21 is arranged at the upper end of the starting winning device unit SU at substantially the center in the left-right direction. The second start winning device 23 is arranged below the first starting winning device 21, in other words, substantially in the center of the lower part of the starting winning device unit SU.

The first start winning device 21 is immovable. Therefore, the first starting port 20 is constant (invariant) without changing the ease of entering the game ball. The prize for the first starting port 20 of the game ball is a lottery of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1") (acquisition and determination of random numbers related to special figure 1 described later: hereinafter, "special figure 1 lottery". ) And the variable display of Special Figure 1. Further, when the game balls win the prize in the first starting port 20, a predetermined number (4 in the first embodiment) of the game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The electric chew 23 includes an actuable electric chew opening / closing member 23K. The electric chew opening / closing member 23K is composed of a tongue-shaped piece having a substantially vertically elongated rectangular shape in a plan view, and is housed in the second starting port 22 in a normally closed state. Specifically, the front end thereof substantially coincides with the game area 3 (the surface of the game board 2), and the entire electric chew opening / closing member 23K is housed inside the second starting port 22. The electric chew opening / closing member 23K can move (advance / retreat) in the front-rear direction from its stored state. When the electric chew opening / closing member 23K moves forward, the electric chew opening / closing member 23K is in a state of projecting vertically to the game area 3, and can receive the flowing game ball and call it into the second starting port 22. In this way, the state in which the electric chew opening / closing member 23K is in the protruding state is also referred to as an "open state", and the game ball can enter the second starting port 22 only when it is in the open state. On the other hand, the state in which the electric chew opening / closing member 23K is housed inside the second starting port 22 is also referred to as a "closed state". In this way, the second starting port 22 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric chew opening / closing member 23K.

The prize for the second starting port 22 of the game ball is a lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2") (acquisition and determination of random numbers related to special figure 2 described later: hereinafter, "special figure 2 lottery". ) And the variable display of Special Figure 2. Further, when the game balls win a prize in the second starting port 22, a predetermined number (4 in the first embodiment) of the game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, one general winning opening 27 is provided on the left side of the first starting winning device 21 in the game area 3. Further, one general winning opening 27 is provided on the right side of the electric chew 23. When a game ball wins a prize in the general prize opening 27, a predetermined number of game balls (three in the first embodiment) are paid out as prize balls.

Further, on the left side and the right side of the image display device 7 in front view, a left gate 281 and a right gate 282 through which a game ball can pass are provided. Hereinafter, the left gate 281 and the right gate 282 are collectively referred to as “gate 28”. Passing through the gate 28 of the game ball is a lottery (that is, acquisition and determination of a normal symbol random number) of a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "general diagram") that determines whether or not to open the electric chew 23 (execute an auxiliary game). And it is an opportunity for variable display of the general map.

Further, on the right side of the start winning device unit SU in the game area 3, a normal AT unit TU provided with the first big winning device 31 (hereinafter, also referred to as “normal AT 31”) in which the first big winning opening 30 is formed is provided. Has been done. Further, a game area 3 in which a game ball can flow down is formed in a part (upper part) of the normal AT unit TU. Further, in the game area 3 normally formed in the AT unit TU, a flow path 37 capable of rolling the game ball along the shape is also provided. The flow path 37 is composed of an inclined surface that descends to the left as a whole.

The first prize-winning device 31 is provided obliquely upward to the right of the electric chew 23, in other words, below the image display device 7 in front view, and on the downstream side of the right gate 282. The first grand prize device 31 includes an operable normal AT opening / closing member 31K. The normal AT opening / closing member 31K is made of a rectangular flat plate that is substantially horizontally long in a plan view, and in a normal closed state, it protrudes vertically from the game area 3 formed in the normal AT unit TU, and while closing the first large winning opening 30, the game It forms the central portion of the flow path 37 through which the sphere can flow. Further, a right inclined surface 371 that is upstream of the normal AT opening / closing member 31K is formed on the right side of the normal AT opening / closing member 31K in the flow path 37, and a normal AT is formed on the left side of the normal AT opening / closing member 31K in the flow path 37. A left inclined surface 372 on the downstream side of the opening / closing member 31K is formed.

Normally, the AT opening / closing member 31K can move rearward from its protruding state. When the normal AT opening / closing member 31K moves rearward, the front end thereof substantially coincides with the game area 3 (the surface of the starting winning device unit SU), and the entire normal AT opening / closing member 31K is inside the starting winning device unit SU. It is stored. Normally, when the AT opening / closing member 31K is stored, the first large winning opening 30 is opened, so that the game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30. As described above, the state in which the AT opening / closing member 31K is normally in the stored state is also referred to as an "open state", and the game ball can be entered into the first large winning opening 30 only when it is in the open state. On the other hand, a state in which the AT opening / closing member 31K normally protrudes from the game area 3 is also referred to as a "closed state". In this way, the first large winning opening 30 is normally opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening / closing member 31K. When the game balls win the first prize opening 30, a predetermined number (14 in the first embodiment) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

At the lower left of the right gate 282 in the game area 3, a second special winning device 33 (hereinafter, also referred to as “VAT 33”) in which the second big winning opening 32 is formed is provided. The second prize-winning device 33 includes an actuable VAT opening / closing member 33K. The VAT opening / closing member 33K is a rod-shaped body having a blade-like shape when viewed from the front, and is usually held in a posture of approximately 90 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction, and closes the second large winning opening 32. The VAT opening / closing member 33K can be rotated about 70 degrees around the lower end so that the upper end falls to the right, and can be in an open state. Only when the VAT opening / closing member 33K is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second large winning opening 32. On the other hand, the state in which the VAT opening / closing member 33K closes the second large winning opening 32 is also referred to as a "closed state". In this way, the second large winning opening 32 is opened and closed by the operation of the VAT opening / closing member 33K. When the game balls win the second prize opening 32, a predetermined number (14 in the first embodiment) of the game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, the second grand prize device 33 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. Inside the second large winning device 33, a gate-shaped second large winning opening sensor 32a that can detect a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 32 and allow the game ball to pass downward is provided. Has been done.

In the downstream area of the second large winning opening sensor 32a, a specific area 34 and a non-specific area 35 through which the game ball can pass (enter) are provided. The game ball that has passed through the second large winning opening sensor 32a is sorted into a specific area 34 or a non-specific area 35 by the distribution device 36. The distribution device 36 includes a distribution member 36K made of a substantially rectangular flat plate and a distribution solenoid 36S for driving the distribution member 36K. The distribution member 36K is configured to be rotatable between a state of being held in the vertical direction and a state of being held in the horizontal direction by driving the distribution solenoid 36S.

When the distribution solenoid 36S is not energized, the distribution member 36K is in the first state of hindering the passage of the game ball to the specific area 34 (passage prevention state: the distribution member 36K of FIG. 2 is tilted to the left). It is in. When the distribution member 36K is in the first state, it is impossible for the game ball that has won the second special winning opening 32 to pass through the specific area 34 after passing through the second large winning opening sensor 32a. , Passes through the non-specific area 35. The route of the game ball flowing down from the second winning opening 32 to the non-specific area 35 is called the first route.

On the other hand, when the distribution solenoid 36S is energized, the distribution member 36K is in the second state (passing allowable state: the distribution member 36K in FIG. 2 is on the right side) that allows the passage (entry) of the specific region 34 of the game ball. It is in a tilted state). When the distribution member 36K is in the second state, the game ball that has won the second special winning opening 32 can easily pass through the specific area 34 after passing through the second large winning opening sensor 32a. The route of the game ball flowing down from the second winning opening 32 to the specific area 34 is called the second route.

Basically, the distribution member 36K is held in the first state. That is, it can be said that the first state is the normal state of the distribution member 36K. Then, only in the opening of the small hit game described later, the distribution solenoid 36S is energized and can change to the second state.

The specific area 34 and the non-specific area 35 are provided with a specific area sensor 34a and a non-specific area sensor 35a that detect a game ball that has passed (entered) the respective areas 34 and 35 and allow the game ball to pass downward. ..

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the passage of the game ball through the specific area 34 (entry into the specific area 34) triggers the execution of the jackpot game described later. That is, it can be said that the big hit lottery is performed depending on whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 34, and the passage of the game ball through the specific area 34 can be regarded as a "big hit winning". Winning a jackpot in the above-mentioned first special figure lottery or second special figure lottery, and stopping and displaying the jackpot symbol described later is called "type 1 jackpot", and passing the game ball through the specific area 34 is "2". Seed jackpot ". In addition, "type 1 jackpot" is also called "direct hit jackpot".

Further, at substantially the lowermost part of the game area 3, two out ports 29 are provided to discharge game balls that have been driven into the game area 3 but have not won any of the winning openings to the outside of the game area 3. There is.

By the way, the game area 3 in which the game ball can flow down can be divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. it can. The operation mode of the handle 60 for firing the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left-handed". On the other hand, the operation mode of the handle 60 for firing the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right-handed". In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is launched by hitting left is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball flows down when the game ball is launched by hitting right. The possible flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also composed of a large number of gaming nails and the like.

A first starting port 20, a left gate 281 and one general winning opening 27 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting port 20, the left gate 281 or the general winning opening 27 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by hitting left. it can. On the other hand, a second starting port 22, a right gate 282, a first large winning opening 30, and a second large winning opening 32 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player launches the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting right, so that the player can pass through the right gate 282, the second starting port 22, the first winning opening 30, or the first. It is possible to aim for a prize in the two major winning openings 32.

Here, with reference to FIG. 3, the behavior around the first starting port 20, the second starting port 22, and the first winning opening 30 of the game ball launched by the left-handed and right-handed hits will be described in detail. .. Similar to the normal AT unit TU, the start winning device unit SU provided with the first starting winning device 21 and the like is formed with a game area 3 in which a game ball can flow down. Then, between the first start port 20 and the second start port 22 in the game area 3, the ball entry suppression unit EC that suppresses the winning of the game ball flowing down the first flow path R1 into the second start port 22 Is provided. The ball entry suppression portion EC is composed of a wall portion arranged substantially perpendicular to the game area 3, and is inclined to descend from the right side of the first start port 20 to the left side of the second start port 22 from right to left. It is formed in a shape. The right end of the ball entry suppression unit EC is formed at a position substantially to the right of the first start port 20 (for example, four game balls), and the left end of the ball entry suppression unit EC is the second start port 22. It is formed at a position substantially to the left of the ball at a predetermined distance (for example, four game balls). Therefore, the first start port 20 and the second start port 22 are separated by the ball entry suppression unit EC.

The upper surface ECa of the ball entry suppression unit EC is inclined downward from right to left. Therefore, the upper surface ECa of the ball entry suppression unit EC functions as a guiding surface for guiding the game ball B1 flowing down the right side of the first starting port 20 to the left side of the second starting port 22. The game ball guided to the left side of the second starting port 22 is guided to the out port 29 (see FIG. 1) arranged in the vicinity of the ball entry suppression unit EC and discharged. Further, when the game ball B2 flowing down the left side of the first starting port 20 reaches the upper surface ECa of the ball entry suppressing portion EC, the upper surface ECa is rolled and guided to the out port 29 and discharged. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is basically configured so that the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path R1 does not enter the second starting port 22. That is, the entry of the left-handed game ball into the second starting port 22 is restricted. It can be said that the ball entry suppression unit EC forms the first taxiway GP1 that guides the game ball flowing down the first flow path R1 so as not to enter the second start port 22.

Further, an opening SUa opened on the right side is provided below the ball entry suppression unit EC in the start winning device unit SU. This opening SUa is connected to a passage TP formed on the right side of the start winning device unit SU, and serves as an entrance to a second taxiway GP2 for guiding the game ball to the second start opening 22. There is. Therefore, the game ball B3 flowing down the passage TP can win a prize in the second starting port 22. As a result, even a game ball flowing down the first flow path R1 may bounce to reach the passage TP to the right of the right end of the ball entry suppression unit EC, and the second start port 22 may be awarded. it can. That is, in the first embodiment, although the start winning device unit SU is provided with the ball entry suppression unit EC, the possibility that the game ball flowing down the first flow path R1 wins the second start opening 22 is completely eliminated. I'm not.

Further, normally, the AT unit TU is formed with a connecting portion DUa capable of guiding the game ball B4 that rolls in the flow path 37 to the opening SUa, which is connected from the downstream end portion of the flow path 37. Therefore, it is possible to win a prize in the second starting port 22 through the connecting portion DUa for the game ball B4 flowing down the second flow path R2.

Further, a general winning opening 27 is provided below the opening SUa in the starting winning device unit SU. Therefore, if the game ball B3 or the game ball B4 does not enter the opening SUa, there is a possibility that the game ball B3 or the game ball B4 will win a prize in the general winning opening 27. In this way, since the start winning device unit SU is provided with the general winning opening 27, even if the number of prize balls for winning the second starting opening 22 is reduced, the prize based on the winning of the general winning opening 27 The sphere makes it possible to prevent the base from becoming too low in the time saving state described later.

If the game ball B3 or the game ball B4 does not enter the opening SUa of the start winning device unit SU or the general winning opening 27, the ball is guided to the out opening 29 and discharged.

Then, in the first embodiment, the first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 merge at their respective downstream portions. The flow path common to the first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 is referred to as a confluence GR. The second starting port 22 (electric chew 23), the general winning port 27, and the out port 29 are arranged in the merging portion GR.

Further, the indicators 40 are arranged in the lower right (the portion other than the game area 3) of the game area 3 formed on the front surface of the game board 2. As shown in FIG. 4, the indicators 40 include a special figure 1 display 411 capable of variably displaying the special figure 1, a special figure 2 display 412 capable of variably displaying the special figure 2, and A normal map display 42 for variably displaying a normal map is included. In addition, the display units 40 can display the number of special figure 1 hold (U1: the number of hold of variable display of special figure 1 by the special figure 1 display 411) described later. The device 431 includes a special figure 2 hold indicator 432 capable of displaying the number of special figure 2 hold (U2: the number of hold of the variable display of special figure 2 by the special figure 2 display 412) described later. There is.

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery is performed when the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. Further, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery is performed when the game ball is won in the second starting port 22. In the following description, special figure 1 and special figure 2 are collectively referred to as special figure, and special figure 1 lottery and special figure 2 lottery are collectively referred to as special figure lottery. Further, the special figure 1 display 411 and the special figure 2 display 412 are collectively referred to as a special figure display 41. Further, the special figure 1 hold indicator 431 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 432 are collectively referred to as a special figure hold indicator 43.

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The stop-displayed special figure (stop special figure, special figure derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special figure selected from a plurality of types of special figures by a special figure lottery. When the stop special figure is a predetermined special figure (special figure of a specific stop mode: a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol described later), it corresponds to the type of the specific special figure displayed as a stop. A special game (small hit game and big hit game) in which the big winning openings 30 and 32 are opened in the opening mode is performed.

The special figure display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the result of the special figure lottery is a big hit (one of a plurality of types of big hits described later), the special figure display 41 is set to "□□ ■■ □□ ■■" (□: lit, ■ : Turns off) to display the jackpot symbol consisting of the lighting of the LEDs 1, 2, 5 and 6 from the left. If the result of the special figure lottery is a small hit, a small hit symbol consisting of lighting only the LED on the far left, such as special figure display 41 "□ ■■■■■■■" Is displayed. In addition, if the result of the special figure lottery is lost, a lost symbol consisting of lighting only the LED on the far right is displayed, such as special figure display 41 "■■■■■■■ □". To do. The lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be turned off as a lost symbol.

Further, in the variable display of the special figure, the variable display of the special figure is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The variation display mode of the special figure is, for example, a mode in which each LED is turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), all the LEDs may be set appropriately, such as blinking all at once.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 22, various random numbers (judgment information) for performing a special drawing lottery or the like may be acquired. is there. These various random numbers are temporarily stored in the special figure holding storage unit 85 (see FIG. 5) as special figure holding. In the following, various random numbers acquired by the game ball winning (winning) in the first starting port 20 are referred to as "special figure 1 related random numbers", and the game ball wins in the second starting port 22. Various random numbers obtained by (entering a ball) are called "special figure 2 related random numbers". Here, the special figure 1 related random number is stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 851 (see FIG. 5) in the special figure hold storage unit 85 as the special figure 1 hold. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related random numbers are stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 852 (see FIG. 5) in the special figure hold storage unit 85 as the special figure 2 hold. The number of special figure 1 holdes that can be stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 851 (the number of special figure 1 hold) and the number of special figure 2 hold that can be stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 852 (special figure 2 hold number). Has an upper limit. In the first embodiment, the upper limit value of the special figure 1 hold number is set to "4", and the upper limit value of the special figure 2 hold number is set to "1". In the following, the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold are collectively referred to as "special figure hold", and the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are collectively referred to as "special figure hold number". Further, the special figure 1 related random number and the special figure 2 related random number are collectively referred to as a “special figure related random number”.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the variable display of the special figure is not performed immediately after the game ball wins the first start port 20 or the second start port 22, specifically, the variable display of the special figure is being executed. If there is a prize during the execution of the jackpot game, the variable display of the special figure (or the right of the special figure lottery) for the prize can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when the special figure hold based on the special figure hold becomes possible for variable display. That is, the digestion of the special figure hold means that the special figure-related random numbers and the like corresponding to the special figure hold are determined, and the variable display of the special figure for showing the determination result is executed.

Then, the number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43. Each of the special figure 1 hold display 431 and the special figure 2 hold display 432 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of special figure hold is displayed by turning on the LEDs for the number of special figure hold.

In addition, the variable display of the general map informs the result of the general map lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, the normal map is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The stopped-displayed normal map (stop-displayed normal map, which is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one regular map selected from a plurality of types of regular maps by a regular map lottery. If the stopped-displayed normal figure is a predetermined specific normal figure (a normal figure in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a winning symbol), the opening mode is set according to the current gaming state and the type of winning symbol. An auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting port 22 (electric chew 23) is opened.

The normal figure display 42 is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and displays a normal figure according to the result of the normal figure lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. When the result of the normal drawing lottery is a hit, the normal figure display 42 displays a winning symbol composed of lighting of both LEDs, such as "□□" (□: on, ■: off). If the result of the regular drawing lottery is a loss, a lost pattern consisting of lighting only the right LED is displayed, such as "■ □". A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost symbol. The lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the general drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate.

Further, the fluctuation display of the normal map is performed for a predetermined fluctuation time before the normal map is stopped and displayed. In the first embodiment, the variation display of the normal drawing is such that both LEDs are turned on alternately. The mode of the variable display in the normal drawing is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), all the LEDs may be appropriately set such as blinking all at once. ..

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming ball passes through the gate 28, a normal symbol random number (determination information) for performing a regular drawing lottery may be acquired. In the following, the ordinary symbol random number acquired by the game ball passing through the gate 28 is also referred to as a “normal symbol-related random number”.

2. 2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a special figure lottery, a variable display of a special figure, a jackpot game, a game state setting described later, a general figure lottery, a variable display of a normal figure, an auxiliary game, and the like. The main control board 80 that controls the game profit (progress of the game), and the game effect according to the progress of the game by the main control board 80 (special figure variation effect, hold effect, jackpot game effect, general figure variation effect, auxiliary game effect) ), The sub-control board 90 that controls the production such as the operation promotion effect that prompts the operation during the period when the operation of the customer waiting effect and the effect button 63 is valid (operation valid period), and the control related to the payout of the game ball. The payout control board 110 and the like are provided on the back side of the image display device 7 of the game board 2. The main control board 80 is positioned as a game control unit that controls the game, and the sub control board 90 is an effect control unit that controls the effect together with the image control board 100, the lamp control circuit 107, and the voice control circuit 106, which will be described later. It can be positioned as. The effect control unit includes at least a sub control board 90, and uses effect means (image display device 7, panel movable device 15, frame lamp 66, speaker 67, etc.) to produce a game, wait for customers, and operate. It suffices if the promotion effect can be controlled.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a power supply board 160. The power supply board 160 supplies power to the main control board 80, the sub control board 90, and the payout control board 110, and also supplies necessary power to other devices via these boards. The power supply board 160 is provided with a backup power supply circuit 161. When power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the backup power supply circuit 161 supplies power to the RAM 84 of the main control board 80 and the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90, which will be described later. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 84 of the main control board 80 and the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 is retained even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected. Further, a power switch 165 is connected to the power supply board 160. The power on / off is switched by the ON / OFF operation of the power switch 165. The backup power supply circuit for the RAM 84 of the main control board 80 may be provided on the main control board 80, or the backup power supply circuit for the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 may be provided on the sub control board 90.

As shown in FIG. 5, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM 83 that stores programs and tables for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, a CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the ROM 83, and input / output of data and signals. The I / O port unit (input / output circuit) 88 for performing the above is included.

The ROM 83 stores a program for performing main control main processing, main timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. Further, in the ROM 83, a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a small hit symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, a special symbol confirmation time determination table, a start winning command specific table, and a special A game control table, a time saving specified number of times judgment table, a hit judgment table, a hit symbol type judgment table, a normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment table, an auxiliary game control table, and the like are stored. The ROM 83 may be externally attached. Further, the RAM 84 is provided with the above-mentioned special figure holding storage unit 85 and the like.

Further, the main control board 80 is equipped with a RAM clear switch 89 for causing the CPU 82 to clear the information stored in the RAM 84.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output by various sensors are input to the main control board 80. Further, the main control board 80 outputs signals to various solenoids.

The various sensors connected to the main control board 80 include a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 22a, a general winning port sensor 27a, a left gate sensor 281a, a right gate sensor 282a, and a first large winning port. A sensor 30a, a second winning opening sensor 32a, a specific area sensor 34a, and a non-specific area sensor 35a are included.

The first start port sensor 20a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 20. The second starting port sensor 22a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 22. The general winning opening sensor 27a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 27. The left gate sensor 281a is provided in the left gate 281 and detects a game ball that has passed through the left gate 281. The right gate sensor 282a is provided in the right gate 282 and detects a game ball that has passed through the right gate 282. The first large winning opening sensor 30a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 32a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second large winning opening 32. The specific area sensor 34a detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 34 (enters the specific area 34). The non-specific area sensor 35a detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 35 (enters the non-specific area 35). When each sensor detects a game ball, it outputs a signal corresponding to the detected content to the main control board 80.

Further, various solenoids connected to the main control board 80 include an electric chew solenoid 23S, a first special winning opening solenoid 31S, a second special winning opening solenoid 33S, and a distribution solenoid 36S. The electric chew solenoid 23S drives the electric chew opening / closing member 23K of the electric chew 23. The first special winning opening solenoid 31S drives the normal AT opening / closing member 31K of the first big winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 33S drives the VAT opening / closing member 33K of the second big winning device 33. The distribution solenoid 36S drives the distribution member 36K of the distribution device 36.

Further, indicators 40 (special figure display 41, normal figure display 42, and special figure hold display 43) are connected to the main control board 80. The display control of these indicators 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. On the payout control board 110, a prize ball payout device 120, a ball rental payout device 130, and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and ball lending is possible based on information such as an inserted prepaid card). The launching device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the connected card unit 135. , The ball rental motor 131 of the ball rental device 130 is driven to pay out the ball rental. The prize ball to be paid out is detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. Further, the ball lending sensor to be paid out is detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting.

Further, the handle 60 is provided with a touch switch 114 capable of detecting contact of a person such as a player with the handle 60. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1), the touch switch 114 detects the contact of the player with the handle 60 and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 110. Further, a firing volume knob 115 capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 60 is connected to the handle 60. The launching device 112 drives the launching motor 113 so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 60 detected by the launching volume knob 115. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, one gaming ball is launched about every 0.6 seconds while the rotation operation to the handle 60 is maintained.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands including information about the game to the sub control board 90 according to the progress of the game. The sub-control board 90 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the main control board 80 based on various commands sent from the main control board 80. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control board 90 is mounted with a production control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “effect control microcomputer”) 91 that controls the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM 93 that stores a program for controlling the effect as the game progresses by the main control board 80, a RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a CPU 92 that executes a program stored in the ROM 93. , An I / O port unit (input / output circuit) 98 for inputting / outputting data and signals is included.

Further, the ROM 93 stores a program for performing sub-control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1ms timer interrupt processing, 10ms timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. Further, in the ROM 93, a hold change notice determination table, a stop symbol determination table, a special figure variation effect pattern determination table, a precursor effect effect execution determination table, a hold change advance notice type determination table, a retention sign effect effect gasse execution determination table, A precursor effect type determination table, a first challenge effect pattern determination table, and the like are stored. The ROM 93 may be externally attached.

A real-time clock (RTC) 99 is mounted on the sub-control board 90. The RTC99 measures the current date and time (date and time). The RTC 99 operates by the electric power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the electric power is supplied from a predetermined island power supply device (not shown), and when the electric power is not supplied from the island power supply device, the power supply board 160 operates. It operates by the electric power supplied from the backup power supply circuit 161 provided. Therefore, the RTC 99 can measure the current date and time even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not turned on. A backup power supply circuit for the RTC 99 may be provided on the sub control board 90. A circuit including a capacitor and a built-in battery (button battery, etc.) can be adopted as the backup power supply circuit.

An image control board 100 is connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 is connected to the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 by the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80, that is, according to the progress of the game by the main control board 80. Display control is performed. The connection between the sub-control board 90 and the image control board 100 can be both transmission of a signal from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100 and transmission of a signal from the image control board 100 to the sub-control board 90. It is a two-way communication connection.

The image control board 100 includes a control ROM 103 that stores a program for image control and the like, a control RAM 104 that is used as a work memory, and a CPU 102 that executes a program stored in the control ROM 103. Further, the image control board 100 includes a CGROM 143 that stores image data displayed on the image display device 7, a VRAM 144 that is used for developing image data stored in the CGROM 143, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 142. It has. Of course, all or part of these electronic components may be composed of one chip. In the CGROM 143, for example, image data for displaying an image displayed on the image display device 7 (still image data, moving image data, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (Including) and image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 142 reads image data from the CGROM 143 and develops it in the expansion area in the VRAM 144 according to the display list created by the CPU 102 based on the command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, the expanded image data is appropriately combined and the image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 144. Then, the image drawn in the frame buffer is output to the image display device 7 as an RGB signal. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display unit 7a.

The display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing the execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The display list contains information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position where the image is drawn, the display priority, the display magnification, and the transmittance of the image.

The effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the voice control circuit 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80, that is, according to the progress of the game by the main control board 80. Is output.

Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. The voice control circuit 106 may be used as a substrate to mount the CPU. In this case, the CPU may be made to execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the board and the audio data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the control ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

Further, various switches serving as input units and various solenoids and motors serving as drive sources are connected to the sub-control board 90 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various switches are input to the sub-control board 90. Further, the sub control board 90 outputs signals to various solenoids and motors.

Various switches connected to the sub-control board 90 include an effect button detection switch 63a. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 has been pressed. When the effect button detection switch 63a detects that the operation has been performed, the effect button detection switch 63a outputs a signal corresponding to the detection content to the sub control board 90.

Various solenoids connected to the sub-control board 90 include a panel movable body solenoid 15S. The board movable body solenoid 15S drives and operates the board movable body 15K. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the panel movable body 15K, and controls the operation of the panel movable body 15K via the lamp control circuit 107. The board movable device 15 is composed of the board movable body 15K and the board movable body solenoid 15S.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of the frame lamp 66 and the like via the lamp control circuit 107 based on a command received from the main control board 80 and the like. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66, and the frame lamp 66 is subjected to light emission pattern data. Control the light emission. The data stored in the ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

The CPU may be mounted on the lamp control circuit 107 as a substrate. In this case, the CPU may be allowed to perform lighting control of the frame lamp 66 and the like and operation control of the panel movable body 15K. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the substrate, and data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

3. 3. Description of the game by the main control board 80 Next, the game played by the main control board 80 will be described. First, I will explain the games related to Fuzu. When the launched game ball passes through the gate 28, the main control board 80 performs a normal drawing lottery on the condition that the variable display of the normal drawing or the auxiliary game is not performed. When the general drawing lottery is performed, the main control board 80 performs variable display (variable display and then stop display) of the general drawing on the general drawing display 42. Here, there are a hit symbol and a lost symbol in the normal figure that is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the lost symbol of the normal figure is also referred to as "missed normal figure" in order to distinguish it from the lost symbol of the special figure described later. When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 28 ends. On the other hand, when the lost general map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 28 ends. Further, in the following, the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 when the variable display of the normal map or the auxiliary game is not performed is referred to as "the establishment of the normal map variation start condition".

The main control board 80 acquires a random number related to the normal map when the normal map variation start condition is satisfied in performing such a series of games (general map lottery, variable display of the normal map, auxiliary game). As shown in FIG. 7A, the random numbers related to the normal symbols to be acquired include a normal symbol random number and a hit symbol type random number. Ordinary symbol random numbers are random numbers (judgment information) for performing collision detection. The winning symbol type random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the winning symbol type. A range is appropriately provided for each random number. Specifically, the range of ordinary symbol random numbers is 0 to 255. The range of random numbers for the winning symbol type is 0 to 65535.

Next, each determination performed using the normal figure-related random numbers will be described. First, the hit determination will be described. The hit determination is a determination for determining whether or not to win (whether or not to execute an auxiliary game) using the hit determination table shown in FIG. 8A. In the hit determination table, the determination value of the normal symbol random number (ordinary symbol random number determination value) is assigned to the hit and the loss which are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the main control board 80 collates the acquired ordinary symbol random numbers with the hit determination table, and determines whether the hit or the loss is a hit. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, basically, the hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the normal figure. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, the lost normal figure is basically stopped and displayed in the variable display of the normal figure.

Next, the winning symbol type determination will be described. The hit symbol type determination is a determination for determining the type of the winning symbol (winning symbol type) using the hit symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 8B when the result of the hit determination is a hit. The type of winning symbol is associated with a winning component composed of the content of the winning, in other words, the game privilege given to the player. The content of the hit (the component of the hit) associated with the hit symbol type will be described later.

In the winning symbol type determination table, the determination value of the winning symbol type random number (the winning symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the winning symbol type which is the result of the winning symbol type determination. Therefore, the main control board 80 collates the acquired random number of the winning symbol type with the winning symbol type determination table to determine the type of the winning symbol. As shown in FIG. 8B, three types of hit symbols, hit symbols A to hit symbol C, are provided as hit symbols.

The winning probability and the distribution rate (%) of the winning symbol type are not limited to FIGS. 8 (A) to 8 (B) and can be set as appropriate. Further, the type of the winning symbol is not limited to the three types of winning symbols shown in FIGS. 8 (A) to 8 (B), and can be appropriately set. For example, more or less than three types of winning symbols may be associated with the winning symbol type random number determination value.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination of the normal map (normal map fluctuation pattern determination) will be described. The normal map fluctuation pattern determination is a determination for determining the normal map fluctuation pattern using the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8C. The normal map fluctuation pattern is identification information related to predetermined items related to the normal map fluctuation display such as the normal map fluctuation time. In addition to the normal map fluctuation time, the normal map fluctuation pattern also includes the result of collision detection.

The normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table is associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state). That is, the normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table includes the normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table (non-time saving normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table) used in the non-time saving state and the normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state (non-time saving normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table). There is a time-saving normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table).

In each normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, one normal figure fluctuation pattern, which is the result of the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination, is stored for each normal symbol to be stopped. That is, in the non-time saving state, the main control board 80 determines the normal figure fluctuation pattern FHP1 for the normal figure fluctuation display when the lost normal symbol (missing normal figure) is stopped and displayed, and stops and displays the hit symbol A. When the normal figure fluctuation display is determined to be the normal figure fluctuation pattern FHP2, and when the hit symbol B is stopped and displayed, the normal figure fluctuation pattern FHP3 is determined and the hit symbol C is stopped and displayed. The normal map fluctuation display is determined by the normal map fluctuation pattern FHP4. Further, in the time saving state, the main control board 80 determines the normal figure fluctuation pattern FHP5 for the normal figure fluctuation display when the lost normal figure is stopped and displayed, and the normal figure fluctuation display when the hit symbol A is stopped and displayed. Is determined to be the normal figure fluctuation pattern FHP6, the normal figure fluctuation display when the hit symbol B is stopped and displayed is determined to be the normal figure fluctuation pattern FHP7, and the normal figure fluctuation display when the hit symbol C is stopped and displayed is determined. The normal map fluctuation pattern FHP8 is determined. The normal map fluctuation time associated with the normal map fluctuation patterns FHP1 and FHP4 to FHP8 is 1 second, and the normal map fluctuation time associated with the normal map fluctuation pattern FHP2 is 30 seconds, and the normal map fluctuation pattern FHP3 The associated normal map variation time is 25 seconds. The normal map fluctuation display of the normal map fluctuation time associated with the normal map fluctuation pattern determined by this determination is performed on the normal map display 42.

In this way, by performing the hit determination, the hit symbol type determination, and the ordinary map fluctuation pattern determination, the ordinary map display 42 performs variable display of the ordinary map. Then, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as the display result (result of the regular drawing lottery) in the variable display of the normal map, the auxiliary game according to the type of the winning symbol is executed.

In the auxiliary game, the opening and closing of the electric chew 23 and the opening of the electric chew 23 for the first time are started after the auxiliary game is started, in other words, the stop display of the winning symbol is performed for a predetermined time to confirm the normal figure. It is composed of an opening in which the electric chew 23 is held in the closed state and an ending in which the electric chew 23 is held in the closed state from the end of the final opening of the electric chew 23 to the end of the auxiliary game.

The elements that make up the auxiliary game (auxiliary game component), that is, the content of the hit, includes the number of times the electric chew 23 opens, the opening time for each opening, the opening time (opening time: OP time), and the ending time. Various elements such as (ending time: ED time) are included. Then, each of these elements is associated with the game state (non-time saving state / time saving state) and the winning symbol type. The main control board 80 controls the auxiliary game by using the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 8D based on the game state (non-time saving state / time saving state) and the winning symbol type. The auxiliary game control table is associated with the game state (non-time saving state / time saving state) and the winning symbol type. Auxiliary game components are stored in each auxiliary game control table. Therefore, when the hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the main control board 80 executes the auxiliary game according to the game state and the hit symbol. Here, the auxiliary game according to the game state will be described.

In the auxiliary game associated with the winning symbol A in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 23 is opened once after the opening of 6.00 seconds. The opening time at this time is 5.00 seconds. Then, after the electric chew 23 is opened, the auxiliary game ends after an ending of 0.008 seconds. Therefore, it is easy to make the electric chew 23 win the game ball when this auxiliary game is executed. In the following, the auxiliary game associated with the hit symbol A in the non-time saving state is also referred to as a “long open auxiliary game”.

In the auxiliary game associated with the hit symbol B and the hit symbol C in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 23 is opened once after the opening of 0.008 seconds. The opening time at this time is 0.02 seconds. Then, after opening the electric chew 23, the ending is completed after 0.008 seconds. Therefore, it is difficult to make the electric chew 23 win the game ball when this auxiliary game is executed. In the following, the auxiliary game associated with the hit symbols B and C in the non-time saving state is also referred to as a “short open auxiliary game”.

In the auxiliary game associated with the hit symbols A to the hit symbols C in the time saving state, the electric chew 23 is opened once after the opening of 0.008 seconds. The opening time at this time is 3.00 seconds. Then, after opening the electric chew 23, the ending is completed after 0.008 seconds. Therefore, it is easy to make the electric chew 23 win the game ball when this auxiliary game is executed.

Next, the game related to the special figure will be described. When the launched game ball wins the first starting opening 20, a special figure 1 lottery is performed on the condition that the number of reserved special figures 1 (U1) is less than 4. When the special figure 1 lottery is performed, the special figure 1 display 411 performs variable display of the special figure 1 (stop display after performing the variable display) to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special figure 1 that is stopped and displayed includes a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol. That is, the result of the special figure 1 lottery includes a big hit, a small hit, and a loss. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the small hit game is executed. When the game ball enters the specific area 34 during the small hit game, the big hit game state is executed after the small hit game, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. On the other hand, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the big hit game or the small hit game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

Similarly, when the launched game ball wins the second starting opening 22, the special figure 2 lottery is performed on the condition that the special figure 2 hold number (U2) is less than 1. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 display 412 performs a variable display of the special figure 2 (stop display after performing the variable display) to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special figure 2 that is stopped and displayed includes a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol. That is, the results of the special figure 2 lottery include a big hit, a small hit, and a loss. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the small hit game is executed. When the game ball enters the specific area 34 during the small hit game, the big hit game state is executed after the small hit game, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. On the other hand, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the big hit game or the small hit game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is finished.

In the following, when the number of reserved special figures 1 (U1) is less than 4, the winning of a game ball in the first starting opening 20 is referred to as "the establishment of the first starting condition", and the number of reserved special figures 2 (U1). When the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 22 when U2) is less than 1, it is called "establishment of the second starting condition". Further, "the establishment of the first starting condition" and "the establishment of the second starting condition" are collectively referred to as "the establishment of the starting condition". In addition, the lost symbol of the special symbol is also referred to as a "lost special symbol" in order to distinguish it from the lost symbol of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol.

In performing such a series of games (special figure lottery, variable display of special figures, small hit game, big hit game, setting of game state), the main control board 80 generates a special figure-related random number when the start condition is satisfied. It is acquired and various judgments are made on the random number. As shown in FIG. 7B, the special symbol-related random numbers to be acquired include a special symbol random number, a big hit symbol type random number, a small hit symbol type random number, a reach random number, and a special symbol variation pattern random number. The special symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for performing a jackpot judgment. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the jackpot symbol type. The small hit symbol type random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the small hit symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (judgment information) for performing reach determination. The special symbol fluctuation pattern random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. A range is appropriately provided for each random number. Specifically, the range of the special symbol random number is 0 to 65535. The range of random numbers for the jackpot symbol type is 0 to 199. The range of random numbers for small hit symbol types is 0 to 199. The range of reach random numbers is 0 to 255. The range of the special figure variation pattern random number is 0 to 99.

Next, each determination performed using the special figure-related random numbers will be described. First, the jackpot determination will be described. The jackpot determination is a determination for determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot (whether or not a jackpot game is executed) using the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 9A. The jackpot judgment table is a type of special symbol that is variably displayed (special figure 1 / special figure 2), in other words, a type of starting port in which a prize is made due to the jackpot judgment (causing the jackpot judgment). (1st start port 20 / 2nd start port 22). That is, the jackpot determination table includes the jackpot determination table (first jackpot determination table) used when the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed and the jackpot determination table (second jackpot determination table) used when the variable display of the special figure 2 is performed. Judgment table).

In each jackpot determination table, a determination value of a special symbol random number (special symbol random number determination value) is assigned to a jackpot, a small hit, and a loss, which are the results of the jackpot determination. The main control board 80 collates the acquired special symbol random numbers with the jackpot determination table, and determines whether it is a jackpot, a small hit, or a loss. As shown in FIG. 9A, the jackpot determination table used when the variable display of the special figure 2 is performed is smaller than the jackpot determination table used when the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed. Many special symbol random number judgment values to be judged are set.

Next, the jackpot symbol type determination will be described. The jackpot symbol type determination is a determination for determining the jackpot symbol type (big hit symbol type) using the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 9B when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. The type of jackpot symbol is associated with a jackpot component composed of the contents of the jackpot, in other words, the game privilege given to the player.

In the jackpot symbol type determination table, the type of special symbol that is variably displayed (special diagram 1 / special diagram 2), in other words, the winning of the jackpot symbol type determination (which caused the jackpot symbol type determination) is performed. It is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 20 / second starting port 22). That is, in the jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed and the jackpot used when the variable display of the special figure 2 is performed. There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

In each jackpot symbol type determination table, the determination value of the jackpot symbol type random number (the jackpot symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type which is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the main control board 80 collates the acquired jackpot symbol type random number with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. Two types of jackpot symbols, jackpot symbols 1A to jackpot symbols 1B, are provided as jackpot symbols (corresponding to special figure 1) when the first starting port 20 is won. On the other hand, two types of jackpot symbols, jackpot symbols 2A to jackpot symbols 2B, are provided as jackpot symbols (corresponding to special figure 2) when the second starting port 22 is won. Then, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

The jackpot winning probability and the jackpot symbol type distribution rate (%) are not limited to FIGS. 9 (A) and 9 (B), and can be set as appropriate. Further, the type of the jackpot symbol is not limited to the four types of jackpot symbols shown in FIG. 9B, and can be appropriately set. For example, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table, more or less types of jackpot symbols than two types may be associated with the jackpot symbol type random number determination value. Further, in the second jackpot symbol type determination table, more or less types of jackpot symbols than two types may be associated with the jackpot symbol type random number determination value.

Next, the small hit symbol type determination will be described. The small hit symbol type determination is to determine the type of small hit symbol (small hit symbol type) using the small hit symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 9 (C) when the result of the big hit determination is a small hit. It is a judgment of. The type of small hit symbol is associated with a small hit component composed of the contents of the small hit, in other words, a game privilege given to the player.

The small hit symbol type determination table is caused by the variablely displayed special symbol type (special figure 1 / special figure 2), in other words, the small hit symbol type determination (the small hit symbol type determination was generated). It is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 20 / second starting port 22) in which the prize was won. That is, in the small hit symbol type determination table, when the small hit symbol type determination table (first small hit symbol type determination table) used when performing the variable display of the special figure 1 and the variable display of the special figure 2 are performed. There is a small hit symbol type determination table (second small hit symbol type determination table) used.

In each small hit symbol type determination table, a small hit symbol type random number determination value (small hit symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the small hit symbol type that is the result of the small hit symbol type determination. Therefore, the main control board 80 collates the acquired small hit symbol type random number with the large hit symbol type determination table to determine the type of the small hit symbol. As the small hit symbol (corresponding to the special figure 1) when the first starting port 20 is won, one kind of small hit symbol 1 of the small hit symbol 1 is provided. On the other hand, three types of small hit symbols (small hit symbol 2A to small hit symbol 2C) are provided as the small hit symbol (corresponding to the special figure 2) when the second starting port 22 is won. Then, in the first small hit symbol type determination table and the second small hit symbol type determination table, the small hit symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various small hit symbols.

The probability of winning a small hit and the distribution rate (%) of each small hit symbol type are not limited to FIGS. 9 (A) and 9 (C), and can be set as appropriate. Further, the type of the small hit symbol is not limited to the four types of small hit symbols shown in FIG. 9C, and can be appropriately set. For example, in the first small hit symbol type determination table, more than one type of small hit symbol may be associated with the small hit symbol type random number determination value. Further, in the second small hit symbol type determination table, small hit symbols having more or less than three types may be associated with the small hit symbol type random number determination value.

Next, the reach determination will be described. The reach determination is a determination for determining whether or not to generate a reach using the reach determination table shown in FIG. 9D when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. Here, in order to explain the reach, the special figure variation effect that is the premise of the reach will be described.

When the variable display of the special figure is performed, the special figure variation effect is performed according to the variable display of the special figure. The special figure variation effect is performed by using various effect devices such as an image display device 7, a panel movable device 15, an effect button 63, a frame lamp 66, and a speaker 67. As the special figure variation effect, the display unit 7a of the image display device 7 performs variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with or substantially synchronized with the variable display of the special figure. That is, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed along with the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation stop (stop display) of the effect symbol is performed along with the variation stop (stop display) of the special symbol. It should be noted that the effect of varyingly displaying the effect symbol is also referred to as the effect symbol change effect. The effect symbol variation effect constitutes a part of the "special figure variation effect".

For example, in the display unit 7a, the effect symbols are the left effect symbol EZ1 displayed relatively on the left side, the middle effect symbol EZ2 displayed relatively in the center, and the right effect symbol displayed relatively on the right side. It is composed of EZ3 (see FIG. 17 and the like). In the following, when the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are collectively referred to, they may be referred to as "effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3".

The effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are each composed of, for example, numbers from "1" to "8". Then, in the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, the numbers constituting the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in the display unit 7a by scrolling from the top to the bottom of the display unit 7a. The numbers (visible) change one after another. The variation display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is not limited to the vertical scrolling mode, and may be another mode such as a horizontal scrolling mode (for example, from right to left). Further, instead of the scroll display, the numbers constituting the effect symbol may be exchanged one after another at a predetermined fixed position (for example, the rotation may rotate at the fixed position). Further, in the special figure variation effect, in addition to the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, an effect image other than the effect symbol such as a background image and a character image described later is also displayed.

Then, when the special figure is stopped and displayed, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a predetermined arrangement (combination). That is, in the variable display, various numbers that have been replaced one after another in the display unit 7a are specified as one. At this time, depending on the combination of the stopped display (specified) effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, the special symbol (variable display result, that is, the result of the special symbol lottery) that is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41 is displayed. , Displayed in an easy-to-understand manner. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. That is, in general, the player does not grasp the result of the special figure lottery by the special figure 1 display 411 or the special figure 2 display 412, but grasps it by the display unit 7a of the image display device 7.

The reach is an effect for making the player expect a big hit by using the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 in the variable effect. Specifically, the reach is a state in which there is only one scroll-displayed effect symbol among the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, and the scroll-displayed effect symbol is stopped and displayed at which symbol. It is a state (for example, a state of "5 ↓ 5") in which a combination of effect symbols indicating a jackpot winning is achieved depending on the scroll (see FIG. 18 (D)). The effect symbols that are not scrolled in the reach are temporarily stopped at a predetermined position in the display unit 7a. Temporary stop means that a predetermined effect symbol stays at a substantially predetermined position (a predetermined effect symbol continues to be displayed in the display unit 7a), that is, it is not replaced with a different effect symbol, but a slight fluctuation (for example, a little). Repeated reciprocating motion in the vertical direction, repeated some rocking, repeated expansion and contraction, etc.). The mode of temporary stop is not limited to these.

The reach determination table is associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state). That is, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table (non-time reduction reach determination table) used in the non-time reduction state and a reach determination table (time reduction reach determination table) used in the time reduction state. The details of the non-time saving state and the time saving state will be described later, but in the non-time saving state and the time saving state, the time required for the variable display of the special symbol (the time from the start of the special symbol variation display to the derivation of the display result: special figure: It is a gaming state that affects the fluctuation time), and the special figure fluctuation time tends to be shorter in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state.

In each reach judgment table, the judgment value of the reach random number (reach random number judgment value) is divided into "with reach (generate reach)" and "without reach (do not generate reach)" which are the results of reach judgment. There is. Therefore, the main control board 80 collates the acquired reach random numbers with the reach determination table, and determines whether or not there is reach (whether or not to generate reach). As shown in FIG. 9 (D), the reach determination table used in the non-time saving state is determined to have "reach (generate reach)" than the reach determination table used in the time saving state. Many judgment values are distributed. If the result of the reach determination is "with reach (generate reach)", in most cases, reach is generated by the special figure variation effect. On the other hand, if the result of the reach determination is "no reach (no reach is generated)", no reach is generated in the special figure variation effect. In the following, the result of reach judgment "with reach (generate reach)" performed on the premise that the result of jackpot judgment is "miss" is referred to as "loss with reach" and "without reach (without reach). "Does not cause reach)" is sometimes referred to as "loss without reach".

By the way, when the special symbol variable display is being performed, the display unit 7a also performs the variable display of the small symbols in addition to the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3. The variable display of the small symbol is performed, for example, in the central portion and the upper portion of the display unit 7a in which the vertical direction of the right end is divided into three equal parts. The small symbols are the upper small symbol KZ1 displayed relatively on the upper side, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2 displayed relatively in the middle in the vertical direction, and the lower small symbol KZ3 displayed relatively on the lower side. It is configured (see FIG. 17 and the like). In the following, when the upper small symbol KZ1, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2, and the lower small symbol KZ3 are collectively referred to, they may be referred to as "small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3".

The small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are variablely displayed with the start of the special figure variable display. That is, the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the variation display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are started at the same time or substantially at the same time. The small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are each composed of, for example, numbers from "1" to "8". Then, in the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3, each of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is replaced with different numbers on the spot. Therefore, while the special symbol variation display is being performed, the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the variation display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are performed. Then, the variation display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is stopped when the special symbol variation display is stopped. That is, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are started at the same time or substantially at the same time. The stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are basically performed by the same combination of numbers (stop display mode). Although details will be described later, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed before they are completely stopped, but the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are not temporarily stopped. Further, when the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are in the reach state, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are not in the reach state, and the three small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are displayed in a variable manner.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination of the special symbol will be described. In the variation pattern determination of the special symbol (special symbol variation pattern determination), the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol (special symbol) shown in FIGS. 10 to 11 shows regardless of whether the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a small hit, or a loss. It is a judgment for determining the fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol by using the fluctuation pattern determination table). The special figure fluctuation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined items related to the special figure fluctuation time, the effect flow (effect content) of the special figure variation effect, and the like. The special figure fluctuation pattern includes information on the result of the jackpot determination and the result of the reach determination, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the effect flow (effect content) of the special figure variation effect.

The special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table is the type of special symbol (special figure 1 / special figure 2) that displays the fluctuation to be judged, in other words, the starting port where the prize is given due to the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment. It is associated with the type (first starting port 20 / second starting port 22). That is, in the special figure variation pattern determination table, the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 10) used when performing the variation display of the special figure 1 and the variation display of the special figure 2 are displayed. There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 11) used at the time of the operation.

Each special figure variation pattern determination table is also associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state). That is, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table includes the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for the non-time saving state) used in the non-time saving state and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table used in the non-time saving state. There is a variation pattern determination table in FIG. 1 (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for a time saving state). On the other hand, regarding the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table, similarly, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table (special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for the non-time saving state) used in the non-time saving state and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table in the non-time saving state are used. There is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table (special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for a time saving state) used.

In addition, each special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state) is further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state include a large hit, a small hit, a loss with reach, and a loss without reach, respectively. Similarly, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state also have a big hit, a small big hit, a loss with reach, and a loss without reach, respectively.

Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for each non-reach loss is also associated with the special figure hold number. Specifically, when the special figure 1 hold number (U1) is 0 to 2, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for non-reach loss and the special figure 1 hold number (U1) are 3 to 4. There is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach, which is used in the above.

In each special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table associated with the type of special symbol and the game state as described above, the special figure fluctuation pattern that is the result of the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment is added to the judgment value of the special figure fluctuation pattern random number (special figure fluctuation pattern random number). Figure Fluctuation pattern Random number judgment value) is sorted. Therefore, the main control board 80 collates the acquired special figure fluctuation pattern random number with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern. Then, the special symbol display 41 performs the variation display of the special symbol of the special symbol variation time according to the special symbol variation pattern determined by this determination.

Then, when the variation display of the special symbol is being performed, the special symbol variation effect based on the special symbol variation pattern is performed. The special symbol variation effect includes a normal special symbol variation effect in which the variation display ends after the variation display of the effect symbol starts and the variation display mode maintains the normal normal mode, and a variation display of the effect symbol starts. There is a special special figure variation effect in which the variation display mode is a special mode different from the usual one. Here, a special aspect is the reach described above.

The special figure variation pattern includes information on the effect flow that constitutes the effect content of the special figure variation effect based on the special figure variation time. The effect flow of the special figure variation effect is shown in the third item from the right of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10 to 11. Here, each effect constituting the effect flow of the special figure variation effect associated with the special figure variation pattern will be described.

As the production that composes the production flow of the special figure fluctuation production, normal fluctuation, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), last challenge production (last chare), and re-challenge There is a production (re-chare).

The normal variation is basically an effect in which each effect symbol is variably displayed at a high speed to the extent that it is difficult to recognize, without the effect symbol becoming a special mode. Then, the entire part of the normal special figure fluctuation effect (the part from the start of the change of the effect symbol to the stop of the change) and the part until the reach is established (determined) in the special special figure change effect are composed of the normal variation. ..

In N reach, immediately after the reach is established (confirmed), the remaining one effect symbol decelerates while the effect symbol constituting the reach is temporarily stopped and maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). It is a production that fluctuates at a slower speed than normal fluctuations. The jackpot expectation suggested by N reach is higher than normal fluctuations and lower than L reach and SP reach, which will be described later. When the special figure variation effect ends at N reach, the remaining one effect symbol that fluctuates at the low speed stops. In the case of a big hit, the remaining one effect symbol basically stops at the same effect symbol as the effect symbol constituting the reach. In the case of a small hit, the remaining one effect symbol stops at an effect symbol indicating a small hit in combination with another effect symbol that has stopped earlier. In the case of loss, the remaining one effect symbol stops at an effect symbol different from the effect symbols constituting the reach. If the special figure variation effect does not end in N reach, the remaining one effect symbol changes at high speed again, and the next effect from N reach (in the first embodiment, L reach or SP reach) while the reach is maintained. ) Develops (switches).

In the L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced and at a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is on the upper left of the display unit 7a, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is on the display unit 7a. In the state of moving to (upper right), the background image dedicated to L reach is displayed (the image is played), and it is a production that is performed for a longer time than N reach. In L reach, an animation image by 2DCG is mainly displayed on the display unit 7a. As the production content of the L reach, a scene composed of a predetermined story is displayed.

In the SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced and at a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is on the upper left of the display unit 7a, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is on the display unit 7a. In the state of moving to (upper right), a dedicated background image for a longer time than the background image for L reach is displayed (the image flows). In SP reach, a 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display unit 7a. Then, as the production content of the SP reach, a scene in which a predetermined character battles with the enemy character at the enemy base is displayed (a battle image is played on the display unit 7a).

In addition, in the "state in which the reach is maintained" in the N reach, the L reach, and the SP reach, the effect symbols constituting the reach in the N reach, the L reach, and the SP reach can be visually recognized on the display unit 7a. In addition to the state of, for example, it is assumed that the effect symbols constituting the reach are difficult to see or cannot be seen from the display unit 7a for a predetermined period in relation to the dedicated background image.

In addition, the last challenge production (last chare) is a production that can be executed mainly according to the special figure 2 variable display in the non-time saving state, and is continuously developed after the general drawing fluctuation production and the auxiliary game production described later. Will be (executed). And the last challenge production is a production that is executed regardless of the success or failure of the reach. In the last challenge production, a special background image is displayed (a special video is played). A background image dedicated to the last challenge production displays a video of whether the main character succeeds or fails in a predetermined challenge (last challenge).

Further, the re-challenge effect (re-challenge) is an effect that can be executed mainly according to the variable display of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving state, and is performed (executed) revived after the last challenge effect. And the re-challenge production is also a production that is executed regardless of the success or failure of the reach. In the re-challenge effect, a dedicated background image is displayed (a dedicated video is played). A background image dedicated to the re-challenge effect displays an image of whether or not the main character can complete a predetermined mission (re-mission).

As shown in the rightmost column of the table of FIGS. 10 to 11, the special figure (big hit judgment result) and the special figure (big hit judgment result) and the variation of the special figure fluctuation pattern including the information about the effect content of the special figure (big hit judgment result) and the fluctuation effect. The name will be given in relation to the production content of the production. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the jackpot is also referred to as "big hit fluctuation". Similarly, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to small hits is "small hit fluctuation", and the special figure fluctuation pattern in which SP reach is performed in the loss with reach is "SP reach loss fluctuation", in the loss with reach. The special figure fluctuation pattern in which L reach is performed is referred to as "L reach loss fluctuation", and the special figure fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation production ends with N reach is referred to as "N reach loss fluctuation", and the loss without reach is defined as the loss. The special figure fluctuation pattern is called "normal loss fluctuation".

In addition, the production flow of the special figure fluctuation effect related to the normal A loss fluctuation to the normal C loss fluctuation that can be selected in the non-time saving state is composed only of the normal fluctuation, but the special figure fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation pattern is composed of only the normal fluctuation. It is different between 13 seconds, 8 seconds and 4 seconds. Similarly, the effect flow of the variation effect related to the shortened A loss variation and the shortened B loss variation that can be selected in the shortened time state is also composed of only the normal variation, but the special figure variation time of the special figure variation pattern is 6 seconds. And 3 seconds are different.

Next, the determination of the fixed time of the special symbol will be described. In the special symbol confirmation time determination (special symbol confirmation time determination), the special symbol confirmation time determination table (special symbol confirmation time determination) shown in FIG. 12 is used regardless of whether the result of the jackpot determination is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. This is a determination for determining the time (special symbol confirmation time) required for the stop display of the special symbol using the table). The stop display of the special symbol is performed after the variable display of the special symbol, and the time required for this stop display is the special symbol confirmation time. Therefore, in the situation where there is a special figure hold, when the special figure change display that is currently being executed ends and the special figure stop display is performed, when the special figure change display stops, the special figure confirmation time has elapsed from that point. Starts the next variable display of special figures.

Then, the special figure determination time determination table is associated with the game state (non-time saving state / time saving state). That is, the special figure confirmation time determination table includes the special figure confirmation time determination table (special figure confirmation time determination table for the non-time reduction state) used in the non-time reduction state and the special figure confirmation time used in the time reduction state. There is a judgment table (special figure confirmation time judgment table for time saving state).

In addition, the special figure confirmation time judgment table is a type of special symbol (special figure 1 / special figure 2) that displays a stop to be judged, in other words, a start in which a prize is given due to the special figure confirmation time judgment. It is associated with the type of mouth (first starting port 20 / second starting port 22). That is, the special figure confirmation time determination table includes the special figure confirmation time determination table (special figure 1 confirmation time determination table) used when the stop display of the special figure 1 is performed, and the stop display of the special figure 2. There is a special figure confirmation time determination table (special figure 2 confirmation time determination table) to be used.

That is, the special figure confirmation time determination table includes the special figure confirmation time determination table for the special figure 1 used in the non-time reduction state and the special figure confirmation time determination for the special figure 2 used in the non-time reduction state. There are a table, a special figure confirmation time determination table for special figure 1 used in the time reduction state, and a special figure confirmation time determination table for special figure 2 used in the time reduction state.

As described above, in each special symbol confirmation time determination table associated with the game state and the type of special symbol, the special symbol confirmation time is stored in association with the jackpot determination result (big hit, small hit, and loss). There is. Therefore, the main control board 80 collates the result of the jackpot determination with the special figure confirmation time determination table to determine the special figure confirmation time. Then, the stop display of the special symbol of the special symbol determination time determined by this determination is performed on the special symbol display 41.

When the stop display of the special symbol is being performed, the stop display of the effect symbol and the stop display of the small symbol are performed on the display unit 7a. However, as will be described in detail later, when the stop display of the special symbol is performed, the stop display of the small symbol is always performed, but the stop display of the effect symbol may not be performed.

Further, when the game ball wins the starting ports 20 and 22 and the special figure-related random numbers are acquired, the main control board 80 is once stored in an area (for example, a buffer) different from the special figure holding storage unit 85 of the RAM 84. Then, the start winning command is specified based on the random number and transmitted to the sub control board 90. The start winning command includes information on the special figure fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation pattern information) determined by the special figure fluctuation pattern determination performed based on the acquired special figure-related random numbers. As described above, since the special figure fluctuation pattern includes information on the type of the starting port, in other words, the type of the special figure, the starting winning command includes the type of the starting port that generated the starting winning command. Information (winning start opening information), in other words, the type of the variable display special figure (special figure type information) performed by the winning that generated the starting winning command is also included. In addition, since the special figure fluctuation pattern includes information on whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (hit / miss information) and information on the presence / absence of reach (reach information), it can be used as a start winning command. Will also include pass / fail information and reach information.

The main control board 80 specifies the start winning command using the start winning command specifying table shown in FIG. 13 based on the acquired special figure-related random numbers. The start winning command specific table is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 20 / second starting port 22) related to the starting winning. That is, in the start winning command specifying table, the starting winning command specifying table when the first starting opening 20 is won (the first starting winning command specifying table) and the starting winning command specifying when the second starting opening 22 is won are specified. There is a table (second start winning command specific table).

The start winning command specific table is also associated with the game state (non-time saving state / time saving state). That is, the start winning command specific table includes the start winning command specific table used in the non-time saving state (starting winning command specific table for the non-time saving state) and the starting winning command specific table used in the non-time saving state (time saving). There is a start winning command specific table for the state).

That is, the start winning command specific table includes the first start winning command specific table used in the non-time saving state, the first starting winning command specific table used in the time saving state, and the non-time saving state. There is a second start winning command specific table to be used, and a second start winning command specific table to be used when the time is shortened.

The start winning command may include at least winning / failing information, and what kind of information is included in the starting winning command can be appropriately changed. As described above, the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the special symbol-related random number, but before the variable display of the special symbol executed based on the special symbol-related random number, the pass / fail information and the like are displayed on the sub-control board 90. By sending to, it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests a jackpot expectation such as a pending change notice, which will be described later, and improve the game entertainment.

As described above, the special figure display 41 displays the special figure in a variable manner by performing the big hit judgment, the big hit symbol type judgment, the small hit symbol type judgment, the reach judgment, the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, and the special figure confirmation time judgment. Is done. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result (result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next variable display of the special symbol is not immediately performed, and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. To. In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result (result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next variable display of the special symbol is not immediately performed, and the small hit game continues. Will be executed. When the game ball passes through the specific area 34 in the small hit game, the next variable display of the special figure is not performed, and the big hit game is subsequently executed. Next, the big hit game and the small hit game will be described. In the following, the big hit game and the small hit game are collectively referred to as "special game".

First, the small hit game will be described. In the small hit game, the large winning openings 30 and 32 are held in a closed state from the start of the small hit game to the opening of the second large winning opening 32 and the opening and closing of the second large winning opening 32 once. The opening (also referred to as OP) and the ending (also referred to as ED) in which the large winning openings 30 and 32 are held in the closed state from the end of opening of the second large winning opening 32 to the end of the small hit game. ) And.

The elements constituting the small hit game (small hit game component) are associated with the type of the small hit symbol that is stopped and displayed to trigger the small hit game. The small hit game component includes an opening time of the second large winning opening 32, an opening time (small hit opening time), an ending time (small hit ending time), and the like.

Then, the small hit game component is stored in the special game control table for controlling the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 14, the special game control table is associated with the small hit symbol. Therefore, the main control board 80 executes (controls) the small hit game by using the special game control table according to the type of the small hit symbol displayed as stopped. Here, the small hit game according to the type of the small hit symbol will be described.

The small hit symbols can be won by the special figure 1 lottery (stop display is possible with the special figure 1 variable display) and the small hit symbol 1 can be won by the special figure 2 lottery (stop display is possible with the special figure 2 variable display). There are four types of small hit symbols, from small hit symbol 2A to small hit symbol 2C.

In the small hit game according to the small hit symbol 1, after the opening of 4.600 seconds, the second big winning opening 32 opens and closes after 1.6 seconds. That is, the second big winning opening 32 is opened for 1.6 seconds. Then, after opening and closing the second large winning opening 32 once, the small hit game ends after an ending of 3.000 seconds.

In the small hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C, after the opening of 0.008 seconds, the second big winning opening 32 opens and closes after 1.6 seconds. That is, the second big winning opening 32 is opened for 1.6 seconds. Then, after opening and closing the second big winning opening 32 once, the small hit game ends after an ending of 6,000 seconds. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the opening time of the small hit game corresponding to the small hit symbols 2A to 2C is extremely short, and the opening time of the second large winning opening 32 allows the game ball to enter. Although it is possible, it is not an easy time, and it is not long and basically short. Therefore, even if the game ball is fired after the small hit game starts, the ball enters the second major winning opening 32. Difficult or impossible to make. In other words, it is easy for the second big winning opening 32 to launch the game ball after the small hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C starts and to enter the second big winning opening 32. It is placed in a position that is not, difficult, or impossible.

In this way, the small hit game is executed according to the type of the small hit symbol, but when the small hit game is started, in other words, from the start of the small hit opening, the distribution member 36K of the distribution device 36 It operates in a certain operation mode regardless of the type of small hit symbol. Here, the operation mode of the distribution member 36K in the small hit game will be described.

The distribution member 36K is normally held in a pass-blocking state, but when 0.008 seconds (8 ms) have passed since the start of the small hit opening, it is put into a pass-permitted state, and that state is 4.600 seconds. After being held (4600 ms), it is returned to the passage blocking state. As a result, in the small hit game of 7.608 seconds corresponding to the small hit symbols 1, 2A to 2C, the distribution member 36K is in the "0.008 second pass blocking state-> 4.6 seconds pass permission state-> 3 It is controlled by a series of constant operation modes consisting of a "passage blocking state for .000 seconds". Since the specific area 34 takes a closed state in which a prize cannot be won and an open state in which a prize can be won by the distribution member 36K, the operation mode of the distribution member 36K can be said to be an opening / closing mode of the specific area 34. .. Hereinafter, the operation mode of the distribution member 36K is also referred to as "opening / closing mode of the specific region 34".

In this way, the distribution member 36K is controlled in a certain operation mode (a specific area 34 is a constant opening / closing mode), but the distribution member 36K is controlled in a certain operation mode (a constant opening / closing mode of the specific area 34). In combination with the opening / closing mode of the second large winning opening 32 in the small hit game, the difficulty (easiness) of allowing the game ball to enter the specific area 34 in the small hit game is set. That is, in the small hit game according to the small hit symbol 1, the second big winning opening 32 is opened for 1.6 seconds after the small hit opening of 4.600 seconds is performed, so that the distribution member 36K is in the pass permission state. The overlapping period between the period held in and the period in which the second large winning opening 32 is open is only 0.008 seconds at the end of the passage permission state of the distribution member 36K. Therefore, in the small hit game according to the small hit symbol 1, it is difficult to allow the game ball to enter the specific area 34. On the other hand, in the small hit game corresponding to the small hit symbols 2A to 2C, the second big winning opening 32 opens for 1.6 seconds after the opening of 0.008 seconds, so that the distribution member 36K is used. The overlapping period between the period held in the pass permission state and the period in which the second major winning opening 32 is open is 1.6 seconds of the entire period in which the second major winning opening 32 is open. .. Therefore, in the small hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C, it is easy to make the game ball enter the specific area 34. In this way, the difficulty (easiness) of allowing the game ball to enter the specific area 34 is set by the combination of the opening / closing mode of the specific area 34 and the opening / closing mode of the second special winning opening 32. In the following, the entry of the game ball into the specific area 34 (passing through the specific area 34) is also referred to as “V passage”. When V is passed during the small hit game, the big hit game according to the small hit symbol is executed with the end of the small hit game. Further, the fact that the specific area 34 is in the open state is also referred to as "V open".

Since it is difficult to pass V in the small hit game according to the small hit symbol 1, the small hit game according to the small hit symbol 1 is called "V non-passing small hit game", and the small hit symbol 1 is called "V non-passing". Also called "passing small hit". Further, since it is easy to pass V in the small hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C, the small hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C is called "V passing small hit game". , Small hit symbol 2A to small hit symbol 2C is also called "V passing small hit".

Next, the jackpot game will be described. As described above, in the jackpot game, the game ball passes through the specific area 34 in the small hit game executed by the jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed (by the type 1 jackpot) or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. (By 2 types of jackpots).

In the jackpot game, a plurality of round games involving opening and closing of the first big winning opening 30 and the big winning openings 30 and 32 are held in a closed state from the start of the big hit game to the start of the first round game. It consists of an opening (also referred to as OP) and an ending (also referred to as ED) in which the big winning openings 30 and 32 are held in a closed state from the end of the final round game to the end of the jackpot game. .. Each round game begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending. In the following, the predetermined number of round games (in a predetermined order) is simply referred to as a "round". For example, the first (first) round game is called "1 round (1R)", and the 10th round game is called "10 round (10R)".

The elements that make up the jackpot game (big hit game component) include the number of round games, the number of times the first big prize opening 30 is opened in each round game, the opening time of the first big winning opening 30, and closing until the next opening. The time to make (closing time), the opening time (opening time: OP time), the ending time (ending time: ED time), etc. are included. The jackpot game component is stored in a special game control table for controlling the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 14, the special game control table is set for each of the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol.

In the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol 1A, the jackpot symbol 1B, the jackpot symbol 2A, and the jackpot symbol 2B, 15 round games are executed after the opening of 10.000 seconds. In each round game, the closed first prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed again. Here, the "maximum" is that when a predetermined number of game balls (winning specified number: "9" in the first embodiment) wins in the large winning openings 30 and 32 in one round game, This is because even if the first prize opening 30 is not opened for 29.5 seconds in the round game, it is forcibly closed at that time. Further, in each round game, the closed state is maintained for 2.0 seconds after the opening of the first large winning opening 30 is completed. The closed state after the opening of the first prize opening 30 is also referred to as an "interval". Then, when the round game is executed 15 times, the jackpot game ends after an ending of 15.000 seconds.

As described above, the total number of round games in the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol 1A, the jackpot symbol 1B, the jackpot symbol 2A, and the jackpot symbol 2B is 15 times, and the actual number of round games is also 15 times. A substantial round game is a round game in which a game ball can be won up to a specified number of prizes in reality. In the following, the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol 1A, jackpot symbol 1B, jackpot symbol 2A, jackpot symbol 2B, small hit symbol 2A to small hit symbol 2C is referred to as "15R jackpot game".

In the big hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C, after the small hit game is completed, 15 round games are executed with an opening of 10.000 seconds in between. Regarding the big hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C, the small hit game is regarded as one round, and the first round game to the fifteenth round game out of the 15 round games are 2 Treat as round to 16 rounds. As a result, the number of executions of the round game in the big hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C is 16 times. In the 2nd to 16th rounds of the big hit game according to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed. Further, as in the 15R jackpot game, in the 2nd to 16th rounds, the 1st prize opening 30 is held in a closed state for 2.0 seconds after the opening of the 1st prize opening 30 is completed. Then, when the round game is executed 15 times, the jackpot game ends after an ending of 15.000 seconds.

As described above, the total number of round games in the big hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C is 16 times. Since the opening time of the second big winning opening 32 in the small hit game constituting one round is 1.6 seconds, the game ball is inserted into the second big winning opening 32 during the small hit game, that is, in one round. It is difficult to get a prize for the specified number of prizes. Therefore, the actual number of round games in the big hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C is 15 times. Therefore, in the following, the big hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C is also referred to as "15R big hit game".

Even in the big hit game according to the small hit symbol 1, after the small hit game is completed, 15 round games are executed with the opening of 10.000 seconds in between, and the big hit game is performed after the ending of 10.000 seconds. Is finished. Also, in the big hit game according to the small hit symbol 1, the small hit game is regarded as one round, and the first round game to the fifteenth round game out of the fifteen round games are two to 16 rounds. Treat as. Therefore, the number of executions of the round game in the big hit game corresponding to the small hit symbol 1 is also 16 times. However, unlike the 15R jackpot game according to the small hit symbol 2A to the small hit symbol 2C, the first big winning opening 30 opens for a maximum of 29.5 seconds in one round game from 2 rounds to 6 rounds. From the 7th round to the 16th round, the first big winning opening 30 opens for a maximum of 0.1 seconds with one opening. From the 7th round to the 16th round of this jackpot game, the opening time of the first big winning opening 30 is extremely short, and in reality, it is a round game in which winning of the first big winning opening 30 cannot be expected. That is, although the total number of round games in this jackpot game is 16, the actual number of round games is five. Therefore, the big hit game according to the small hit symbol 1 is also referred to as "5R big hit game".

When the jackpot game is performed as described above, the main control board 80 newly sets the game state after the jackpot game with the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, the main control board 80 sets a time saving state with the end of the jackpot game. Here, the newly set time saving state is obtained by executing the variable display of the special figure of a predetermined number of times (time saving specified number of times) without winning the jackpot in the time saving state, or by shortening the time. It ends when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed before the variable display of the special figure of the specified number of times is executed. That is, the specified number of time reductions constitutes the newly set specified period of the time reduction state, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot that causes the time reduction state and the jackpot symbol type or the small hit symbol type related to the jackpot winning. It is set based on. Specifically, it is determined based on the time saving specified number of times determination table shown in FIG.

The specified number of time reductions in the time saving state set when the jackpot symbol 1A or the jackpot symbol 2A is won is 100 times regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Further, the time saving specified number of times in the time saving state set when the jackpot symbol 1B or the jackpot symbol 2B is won is 5 times regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Further, the specified number of time reductions in the time reduction state set when the small hit symbol 1 is won is 5 times regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. Further, the time saving specified number of times in the time saving state set when the small hit symbol 2A is won is 100 times regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. Further, the specified number of time reductions in the time reduction state set when the small hit symbol 2C is won is 5 times regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit. Further, the time saving specified number of times in the time saving state set when the small hit symbol 2B is won is 100 times when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is the non-time saving state, and 5 times when the time saving state is won.

In the jackpot symbol type determination for special figure 1, the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol (big hit symbol 1A), which has a relatively large number of time reductions, is 50%, whereas in the jackpot symbol type determination for special figure 2. , The distribution rate of the jackpot symbol (big hit symbol 2A), which has a relatively large number of time reductions, is 70% (see FIG. 9B). Further, in the jackpot determination for Special Figure 1, the probability of winning a small hit is about 1%, whereas in the jackpot determination for Special Figure 2, the probability of winning a small hit is about 16% (). (See FIG. 9A). In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure 2 lottery in which the game ball is won in the second starting port 22 is performed rather than the special figure 1 lottery in which the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. However, it is set to be advantageous for the player.

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a normal gaming state, which is a normal gaming state, and a time saving state. In the time saving state, the special figure fluctuation time tends to be shorter than in the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the time-saving state, the special figure fluctuation pattern having a short special figure fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time-saving state, using the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. The determination is made (see FIGS. 10-10). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be memorized as the special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

Further, in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure tends to be shorter than that in the normal gaming state. In the first embodiment, the normal map fluctuation time is determined based on the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state. Specifically, the normal map fluctuation time is determined to be either 1.0 second, 30.0 seconds, or 25.0 seconds in the non-time saving state, and 1.0 seconds in the time saving state. .. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the number of executions of the general drawing lottery per unit time is larger. Considering this and the fact that the probability of being judged as a hit in the collision detection is the same in the normal game state and the time saving state, it is possible that the time saving state has more executions of the auxiliary game per unit time. it can.

Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 23 in one auxiliary game tends to be longer than in the normal state. This is because, in the normal game state, the 5.0-second electric chew 23 is released with a probability of 70/65536 and the 0.02 second electric chew 23 is released with a probability of 65446/65536 in one auxiliary game. The expected value of the opening time of the electric chew 23 is 5.0 seconds × (70/65536) + 0.02 seconds × (65446/65536) = 0.025 seconds, whereas one auxiliary game in the time saving state This is because the opening time of the electric chew 23 in the above is 3.0 seconds.

In this way, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 23 per unit time becomes longer than in the normal game state, and the game ball can easily win a prize in the second starting port 22. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, in a short time state with a high base, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls possessed.

In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal map tends to be shorter and the opening time of the electric chew 23 in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than in the normal game state, and there are two games related to the normal game. In terms of points, it is set in favor of the player, but either one may be set in favor of this player. Further, in addition to these, or when these advantageous points are not set, the probability that the time-saving state is determined to be a hit in the hit determination may be higher than that in the normal game state. Finally, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 23 per unit time becomes longer than in the normal game state, and it is sufficient that the game ball can easily win a prize in the second starting port 22. In addition, the normal game state is also referred to as a "non-time saving state" in which the time saving state is not set. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the winning probability of winning in the hit determination of the normal symbol, the winning probability of the winning symbol A in the winning symbol type determination, the normal symbol fluctuation time, the opening time of the second starting port 22 in the auxiliary game, and the game Considering the arrangement of the nails and all the factors that affect the winning of the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 22, such as the positions of the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 22, the non-time saving state In the (normal game state), the first starting port 20 is easier to win a prize than the second starting port 22 (electric chew 23), and in the time saving state, the second starting port 22 (electric chew 23) is easier than the first starting port 20. 23) is configured to make it easier to win a prize.

The gaming state after the power is turned on for the first time in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the “normal gaming state”. Also, during the jackpot game, the game state is set to the normal game state. That is, with the start of the jackpot game, the game state is reset and the normal game state is set.

4. Explanation of Production by Sub-Control Board 90 As described above, the main control board 80 performs special drawing lottery, variable display of special figures, big hit game, etc. by winning a prize in the starting ports 20 and 22 of the game ball. Then, the sub-control board 90 executes various effects according to the content of the game performed by these main control boards 80. Hereinafter, specific examples of various effects performed by the sub-control board 90 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 37. In addition, in FIGS. 16 to 36, the display unit 7a of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially simplified and extracted in order to explain various effects.

4-1. Special figure fluctuation effect First, the special figure variation effect will be explained. When the variable display of the special symbol is started, the sub-control board 90 has a special symbol variation pattern and a special symbol lottery result (big hit determination result, jackpot symbol type determination result, reach determination result, and reach determination result) related to the variable display of the special symbol. The special figure fluctuation effect is controlled based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination result) and the like. In the special figure variation effect, the display unit 7a superimposes the effect symbol on a predetermined background image to perform variable display. In the variable display of the effect symbol, it stops after the effect symbol changes. That is, after the special symbol fluctuation time and the variation display of the effect symbol are performed, the variation is stopped and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. When the variable display of the effect symbol is performed, it may be suggested that the jackpot may have been won (so-called "big hit expectation"). Then, the result of the special figure lottery is notified by the stop display of the effect symbol.

The effect content of the special figure variation effect is associated with the effect mode. The effect mode is a division (or a higher-level conceptual attribute) of the special figure variation effect. In the first embodiment, a normal effect mode and a time saving effect mode are set as the effect mode. Therefore, the special figure variation effect includes a special figure variation effect in the normal effect mode and a special figure variation effect in the time saving effect mode.

The normal effect mode can be set in the normal game state, and is an effect mode indicating the normal game state. When the normal effect mode is set, the background image of the mountain is displayed on the display unit 7a. On the other hand, the time saving effect mode is an effect mode that can be set in the time saving state, and is an effect mode indicating that the time saving state is set. When the time saving effect mode is set, the background image of the universe is displayed on the display unit 7a. The background image here mainly includes the L reach and SP reach in the special variation effect, and the effect other than the challenge effect to V described later, in other words, the entire section in the normal variation effect and the reach are established. The section from the start of the special figure fluctuation effect to the reach + during the N reach before the L reach or SP reach in the special variation effect, and the background image when the special figure variation effect and the demo effect are not executed. is there. As will be described later, in the L reach, SP reach, and V challenge effects, a background image dedicated to the effects is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the background images in the normal effect mode include a background image G100 (daytime normal background image G100) representing a daytime mountain landscape and a background image G101 representing a nighttime mountain landscape (nighttime). There is a background image G101 for normal use) and a background image G102 (background image G102 for normal use in the evening) showing a mountain landscape in the evening. Then, the daytime normal background image G100, the nighttime normal background image G101, and the evening normal background image G102 are special 50 times without winning a jackpot when the normal background image is displayed. It can be switched with the condition that the figure variation effect is performed. In the first embodiment, when the special figure variation effect is performed 50 times while the daytime normal background image G100 is displayed, the daytime normal background image G100 is switched to the evening normal background image G102, and the evening normal background is switched to. When the special figure variation effect is performed 50 times while the image G102 is displayed, the evening normal background image G102 is switched to the nighttime normal background image G101, and when the nighttime normal background image G101 is displayed 50 When the special figure variation effect is performed, the background image G101 for normal use at night is switched to the background image G100 for normal use during daytime. That is, the daytime normal background image G100 → the evening normal background image G102 → the nighttime normal background image G101 → the daytime normal background image G100 ... The normal background image is switched in a predetermined order. Immediately after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the daytime normal background image G100 is displayed.

Next, an area for producing an effect on the display unit 7a will be described. As shown in FIG. 17 (A), the left side, the center, and the right side of the display unit 7a are divided into three horizontally, respectively, the left side effect symbol area 70a1, the center effect symbol area 70a2, and the right side effect symbol area. It is set to 70a3. The left effect symbol area 70a1 is an area for displaying the left effect symbol EZ1 when the normal effect and N reach in the special symbol variation effect and the stop display of the effect symbol are displayed. Similarly, the central effect symbol area 70a2 and the right effect symbol area 70a3 are areas for displaying the middle effect symbol EZ2 and the right effect symbol EZ3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17A, the center and the upper side of the right end portion of the display unit 7a divided into three in the vertical direction substantially evenly are the small symbol area 71a corresponding to the special figure 1 and the small corresponding to the special figure 2, respectively. The design area 72a. The small symbol area 71a corresponding to the special figure 1 is an area in which the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are variably displayed when the special figure 1 variable display is performed. Further, the special figure 2 corresponding small symbol area 72a is an area for variably displaying the small symbol when the special figure 2 variable display is performed.

In FIG. 17A, the left side effect symbol area 70a1, the center effect symbol area 70a2, the right side effect symbol area 70a3, the special figure 1 corresponding small symbol area 71a, and the special figure 2 corresponding small symbol area 72a are clearly indicated by broken lines. However, this is described to represent the range of the left side effect symbol area 70a1, the center effect symbol area 70a2, the right side effect symbol area 70a3, the special figure 1 corresponding small symbol area 71a, and the special figure 2 corresponding small symbol area 72a. Yes, it is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the special figure variation effect will be described. However, in the following, the special figure variation effect performed when the normal effect mode is set and the daytime normal background image G100 is displayed on the display unit 7a will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 17A, on the display unit 7a, the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed on the daytime normal background image G100, and the upper and lower images are displayed. The symbol KZ1, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2, and the lower small symbol KZ3 are stopped and displayed, the special symbol variation display is not performed, and the special symbol variation display starts from the state of waiting for the special symbol variation display. Then, as shown in FIG. 17B, the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is started with the start, and the variation of the upper small symbol KZ1, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2, and the lower small symbol KZ3 is started. The display starts. Then, if the special symbol variation pattern of the newly started variation display of the special symbol is the special symbol variation pattern of the loss without reach (for example, the normal A loss variation), the variation of the special symbol does not occur. Along with the end of the display (stop display of the special symbol), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is performed with the loss stitches (so-called "bare stitches") peculiar to the loss without reach. Toward the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, for example, first, as shown in FIG. 17 (C), the left effect symbol EZ1 temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and then FIG. 17 (D). As shown in FIG. 17 (E), the right effect symbol EZ3 temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and further, as shown in FIG. 17 (E), the middle effect symbol EZ2 temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction. Finally, as shown in FIG. 17 (F), the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, which are temporarily stopped in a state of being arranged in the horizontal direction at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, are completely stopped all at once. The stop is confirmed (the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 is performed). When the temporarily stopped effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are completely stopped at different points, that is, when the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped, the three small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 The production symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped all at once in the same pattern, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed.

In the example of FIG. 17, when the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left effect symbol EZ1 → right effect symbol EZ3 → middle effect symbol EZ2. The mode of stopping is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate.

Next, the special figure variation effect when reach occurs will be described. In this case as well, as in the case of no reach described above, as shown in FIG. 18A, the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed on the display unit 7a. From the state where the upper small symbol KZ1, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2, and the lower small symbol KZ3 are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special symbol is started, and as shown in FIG. 18B, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 It is assumed that the variable display starts and the variable display of the upper small symbol KZ1, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2, and the lower small symbol KZ3 starts. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (C), the left effect symbol EZ1 composed of the number "5" temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and then, as shown in FIG. 18 (D), the same number. The right effect symbol EZ3 consisting of "5" is temporarily stopped side by side in the horizontal direction at a substantially central position in the vertical direction to reach (reach is generated or established). Even if the reach is established by the effect symbol, the variable display of the upper small symbol KZ1, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2, and the lower small symbol KZ3 is continuously performed.

In the example of FIG. 18, when the reach occurs, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of the left effect symbol EZ1 → the right effect symbol EZ3, but the mode of the temporary stop is not limited to this, and may be set appropriately. Can be done. In addition, the numbers of the production symbols that make up the reach are not limited to "5". Further, the position of temporary stop is not limited to the substantially central position in the vertical direction. Further, the direction in which the effect symbols constituting the reach are arranged is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be another direction such as an oblique direction.

Next, after the reach is established, the effect (reach effect) performed while the reach is held will be described. As shown in FIG. 18D, when the reach is established, the N reach is started from that point. In the N reach, as shown in FIG. 19A, the state in which the reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N reach is started, the medium effect symbol EZ2, which is displaying (scrolling) at high speed in the normal mode, gradually decelerates.

Here, when the special figure variation effect being executed ends in N reach, the medium effect symbol EZ2 temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction from this N reach state, and the effect according to the result of the special figure lottery. The stop display of the symbol is performed. If the lottery result of the special figure lottery caused by the special figure fluctuation effect during execution is "missing", the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed. In this special figure variation effect, since reach is generated, as shown in FIG. 19 (B), the numbers are different from the numbers constituting the reach (“4” in FIG. 19 (B-1)). The production symbol EZ2 temporarily stops. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special symbol (stop display of the special symbol), as shown in FIG. 19 (C-1), the temporary stop state becomes a complete stop state, and the loss peculiar to the loss with reach The left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed by the eyes. Further, when the temporarily stopped effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are completely stopped at the loss pattern peculiar to the loss with reach, that is, when the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the three small ones are displayed. The symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are stopped all at once with the same loss as the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, which is peculiar to the loss with reach, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special figure lottery is "big hit" and the special figure fluctuation effect ends with N reach, for example, it is the same as the numbers constituting the reach, as shown in FIG. 19 (B-2). The middle effect symbol EZ2 consisting of numbers temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and when the variation display of the special symbol ends (stop display of the special symbol), it temporarily stops as shown in FIG. 19 (C-2). The state becomes a completely stopped state, and the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed at the hits peculiar to big hits such as doublets. Further, when the temporarily stopped effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are completely stopped at a hit peculiar to the jackpot, that is, when the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the three small symbols KZ1 , KZ2, KZ3 all stop at the same hits peculiar to the big hit as the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, when it does not end with N reach, in other words, when it develops into L reach or SP reach, for example, when it ends with N reach, the middle effect symbol EZ2 is temporarily stopped at the same timing as the middle effect symbol EZ2. Again performs a normal mode (high speed) variable display and rushes into L reach and SP reach.

When developing from N reach to L reach, the temporarily stopped left effect symbol EZ1 moves to the upper left of the display unit 7a while shrinking, and the temporarily stopped right effect symbol EZ3 shrinks to the upper right of the display unit 7a. (See FIG. 20 (A-1)). Further, the background image G100 for normal daytime is switched to the background image G105 dedicated to L reach (see FIG. 20 (A-1)). The background image G105 dedicated to L reach is composed of 2DCG images (scenes) in which the main character and the enemy character battle in the city. On the other hand, when developing from N reach to SP reach, as in the case of L reach, the temporarily stopped left effect symbol EZ1 moves to the upper left of the display unit 7a while shrinking, and the temporarily stopped right effect symbol. EZ3 moves to the upper right of the display unit 7a while shrinking (see FIG. 20 (A-2)). Further, the background image G100 for normal daytime is switched to the background image G106 dedicated to SP reach (see FIG. 20 (A-2)). The background image G106 dedicated to SP reach is composed of a 3DCG image (scene) in which the main character and the enemy character battle with the enemy hideout.

If it is lost, finally, as shown in FIG. 20 (B-1), the background image G105 dedicated to L reach or the background image G106 dedicated to SP reach is switched to the background image G100 for daytime normal use, and the loss is achieved. The stop display of the effect symbols (the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3) is performed, and the next special symbol variation effect is performed. On the other hand, if it is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 20 (B-2), the background image G105 dedicated to L reach or the background image G106 dedicated to SP reach is finally switched to the background image G100 for daytime normal use, and the big hit The stop display of the effect symbols (the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3) is performed, and the jackpot game effect is performed.

4-2. Hold effect Next, the hold effect corresponding to the special figure 1 hold will be described. In the description of the hold effect, the display and description of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted.

As described above, even if the game ball wins the first starting port 20 and the special figure 1 related random number is acquired, the special figure variable display is executed at that time, or the special game is executed. In this case, the special figure 1 variable display cannot be performed immediately based on the acquired special figure 1 related random numbers. In such a case, the main control board 80 stores the special figure 1 related random number in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 851 of the RAM 84, and holds the special figure 1 variable display. When the special figure 1 variable display is held, in other words, when the special figure 1 hold occurs, the sub-control board 90 performs a hold effect indicating the special figure 1 hold. Specifically, the main control board 80 identifies a start winning command including hit / miss information, special figure fluctuation pattern information, and the like based on the acquired special figure 1 related random numbers, and transmits the start winning command to the sub control board 90. The sub-control board 90 executes the hold effect based on the transmitted start winning command.

As shown in FIG. 21A, the hold effect is performed in the hold display area 73a formed in a substantially central section at the lower end of the display unit 7a. The hold display area 73a is composed of a first area 73a1, a second area 73a2, a third area 73a3, and a fourth area 73a4, which are obtained by dividing the hold display area 73a into four in the left-right direction substantially evenly. That is, in the hold display area 73a, the first area 73a1 to the fourth area 73a4 are provided side by side in order from the left end to the right end. In the first region 73a1, the special figure 1 variable display occurs first among the reserved special figure 1 hold, and the special figure 1 variable display is the first line based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 hold. The hold icon indicating the special figure 1 hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second region 73a2 to the fourth region 73a4, the second to fourth occurrences in the reserved special figure 1 hold occur, and based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 hold. The hold icon representing the special figure 1 hold on which the special figure 1 variable display is performed is displayed in the 2nd to 4th positions. In the following, the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first area 73a1 is referred to as "special figure 1 hold in the hold order 1". Similarly, the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icons displayed in the second area 73a2, the third area 73a3, and the fourth area 73a4 is referred to as "special figure 1 hold in hold order 2" and "hold order 3". It is referred to as "Special Figure 1 Hold" and "Special Figure 1 Hold in Hold Order 4". That is, the existing special figure 1 hold is referred to as "hold order 1" to "hold order 4" in the order of occurrence.

Further, the variable display area 74a is formed on the left side of the hold display area 73a. In the variation display area 74a, a variation icon representing the currently executing special figure 1 variation display is displayed. Therefore, the target indicated by the variable icon displayed in the variable display area 74a is different from the target indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 73a, and strictly speaking, it is a “hold effect” corresponding to the special figure 1 hold. Is not included, but since the display of the hold icon and the display of the variable icon are related, in the following, the display of the hold icon and the display of the variable icon are collectively referred to as "hold effect". .. In addition, the hold icon and the variable icon are collectively referred to as an "icon".

In FIG. 21 (A), the hold display area 73a and the variable display area 74a are clearly indicated by a broken line, but this is described to represent the range of the hold display area 73a and the variable display area 74a. , Is not actually displayed. In addition, the hold display area 73a and the variable display area 74a are not described in the following description of the hold effect and the challenge effect to V described later.

Next, a specific example of the hold effect will be described. As a premise, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is currently being displayed (the special figure variation is being produced), and the special figure 1 hold number (U1) is "2". Under this circumstance, as shown in FIG. 21 (B), in the above-mentioned first area 73a1 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold (holding order) that occurred first among the special figure 1 hold currently held. The hold icon HA2 representing the special figure 1 hold of 1 is displayed, and in the above-mentioned second area 73a2 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold (hold order 2) that occurs after the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA2 is displayed. The hold icon HA3 indicating the special figure 1 hold) is displayed. Further, in the above-mentioned variation display area 74a (not shown), the variation icon HA1 representing the currently executing special figure 1 variation display is displayed. The display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 21B is a normal mode.

As described above, in the hold effect, the hold display areas 73a are displayed side by side from the left end to the right in the order in which the special figure 1 hold occurs. That is, the variable display of the reserved special symbol, in other words, the variable display of the unexecuted special symbol based on the special symbol-related random number stored in the special symbol reservation storage unit 85 is individually displayed by the hold icon. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (C), when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is performed, the change icon HA1 representing the special figure change display being executed until immediately before that is deleted. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold representing the hold icon HA2, the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 shift. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 displayed in the first area 73a1 moves to the variable display area 74a (not shown), and the hold icon HA3 displayed in the second area 73a2 moves to the first area 73a1 (not shown). Move to. That is, the displayed hold icon HA2 and hold icon HA3 are shifted to the left by one each. This is because the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA3 is the earliest special figure 1 hold among the currently held special figure 1 hold. This is to adapt the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 to the current situation according to the change of the special figure variable display to be started next.

Further, since the hold icon HA2 displayed in the variation display area 74a represents the special figure 1 variation display being executed, it becomes the variation icon HA2 when it is displayed in the variation display area 74a. That is, as a word that precedes the "icon", the icon displayed in the hold display area 73a is referred to as "hold", and the icon displayed in the variable display area 74a is referred to as "variation". In other words, when the hold icon is displayed and the start condition for the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied for the special symbol hold indicated by the hold icon, the variable display of the special symbol related to the establishment of the start condition is displayed. The corresponding hold icon is displayed as a variable icon. Further, when the hold icon is changed to the variable icon, in other words, the icon is enlarged about twice when moving from the hold display area 73a to the variable display area 74a.

Then, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20 from this situation and the special figure 1 hold occurs, as shown in FIG. 21 (E), a new hold occurs in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold. The icon HA4 is displayed in the second region 73a2 (not shown) described above.

By the way, as described above, the start winning command includes the winning / failing information and the special figure fluctuation pattern information. Then, the sub-control board 90 executes the hold effect based on the start winning command, and determines whether to display the hold icon in the normal mode or the special mode based on the hit / fail information and the special figure fluctuation pattern information. judge. Displaying this hold icon in a special mode is called "hold change notice". The pending change notice is an effect (so-called "look-ahead effect") that suggests a jackpot expectation level from a preliminary stage in which the variable display of a special symbol is suspended. The sub-control board 90 makes the display mode of the hold icon a special mode with a predetermined probability based on the hit / fail information and the special figure fluctuation pattern information. As described above, when the display mode of the hold icon is a special mode, the player can expect that the jackpot may be won by the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon. Then, in the first embodiment, three types of effect of the pending change notice are provided. Next, the pending change notice will be described. As a specific example of the hold change notice, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon HA4 shown in FIG. 21 (E) is a special mode.

As one type of hold change notice, a special mode is set immediately after the hold icon is displayed, in other words, the hold change notice is given when the special figure 1 hold occurs (when the first starting port 20 is won). There is a pending change notice type. For example, as shown in FIG. 22 (A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 21 (D)), the game ball wins the first starting port 20 and the special figure 1 is held. When the above-mentioned second region 73a2 (not shown) is generated, as shown in FIG. 22 (B), the hold icon HA4 in the normal mode (white in FIG. 22 (B)) corresponds to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold. Immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 22 (C), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 22 (C)). Will be). In the example of FIG. 22, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment immediately after the display, but it may be displayed in the special mode and the period displayed in the normal mode may be eliminated.

As the next type of hold change notice, there is a hold change notice type in which the hold icon becomes a special mode when the hold icon moves, in other words, the hold change notice is given when the hold change is shifted. For example, as shown in FIG. 23 (A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 21 (D)), the game ball wins the first starting port 20 and the special figure 1 is held. When the above-mentioned second region 73a2 (not shown) is generated, as shown in FIG. 23 (B), the hold icon HA4 in the normal mode (white in FIG. 23 (B)) corresponds to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold. Is displayed in. Then, as shown in FIG. 23 (C), when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is performed, the change icon HA2 representing the special figure change display being executed until immediately before that is deleted. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA3, it is displayed in the first area 73a1 as shown in FIG. 23 (D). The hold icon HA3 moves to the variable display area 74a (not shown), and the hold icon HA4 displayed in the second area 73a2 moves to the first area 73a1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 73a2 to the first area 73a1, the display mode changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 23 (D)) (hold change notice is performed). ).

As the next type of hold change notice, when the hold icon is stagnant at a predetermined position, in other words, after the special figure change display starts and the hold icon has finished moving, an action is taken from another image. There is a pending change notice type that becomes a special mode by receiving it. For example, as shown in FIG. 24 (A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 21 (D)), the game ball wins the first starting port 20 and the special figure 1 is held. When the above-mentioned second region 73a2 (not shown) is generated, as shown in FIG. 24 (B), the hold icon HA4 in the normal mode (white in FIG. 24 (B)) corresponds to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold. Is displayed in. Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (C), when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is performed, the change icon HA2 representing the special figure change display being executed until immediately before that is deleted. Subsequently, when a new variable display of a special symbol (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA3, it is displayed in the first area 73a1 as shown in FIG. 24 (D). The reserved icon HA3 that has been displayed moves to the variable display area 74a (not shown), and the reserved icon HA4 that has been displayed in the second area 73a2 moves to the first area 73a1 (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 24 (E), when one second has passed since the start of the new special figure fluctuation effect, an image G1 (small flying object image) representing a small flying object is displayed from around the upper right corner of the display unit 7a. G1) appears and moves to the left in the horizontal direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (F), when the small flying object image G1 approaches directly above the hold icon HA4, an image showing a flash of light from the small flying object image G1 toward the hold icon HA4. (Flash image G2) is fired. Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (G), when the flash image G2 collides with the hold icon HA4, the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 24 (D)) ( (Holding change notice is performed), as shown in FIG. 24 (H), the small flying object image G1 fades out from the upper left corner of the display unit 7a.

As described above, the hold change notice type in which the hold change notice is given when the special figure 1 hold occurs (at the time of winning), the hold change notice type in which the hold change notice is given when the special figure 1 hold shift occurs, and the special figure. There is a hold change notice type that is performed after the change display starts and after the hold icon has finished moving. In the following, the hold change notice given at the time of winning is referred to as the hold change notice at the time of winning, the hold change notice given at the time of shift is referred to as the hold change notice at shift, and the hold change notice given after the shift is completed is called the pending change notice during change. Called a notice.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, the small flying object image G1 appears and moves to the left in the horizontal direction as in the case of the pending change notice during fluctuation, but the flash image G2 is displayed without being emitted. It may fade out from the upper left corner of the portion 7a. That is, although the small flying object image G1 appears, there are cases where the pending change notice is not given during the change. Therefore, the appearance of the small flying object image G1 does not necessarily mean that the pending change notice is given during the change. By making the small flying object image G1 appear in this way, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the pending change notice. In the following, the effect suggesting that the small flying object image G1 may appear and move to the left in the horizontal direction to the position where the flash image G2 is emitted, and a pending change notice may be given is described as "keeping". It is also called "change sign production". In addition, the fact that the change notice was not given during the change is also referred to as the "change notice under change".

4-3. Challenge effect to V Next, the challenge effect to V that can be executed in the normal effect mode will be described. The challenge effect to V can be executed in the normal effect mode, and in the normal game state (non-time saving state), which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state, the effect toward the small hit winning by the special figure 2 lottery, In other words, it is a production that gives expectations to the execution of the V-passing small hit game. The challenge production to V is mainly composed of the first half of the challenge production to V that is performed first and the second half of the challenge production to V that is executed after the first half of the challenge production to V. The content of the first half of the challenge to V and the content of the second half of the challenge to V are related. The first half of the challenge production to V is performed with the FHP2 (hit symbol A) normal figure fluctuation display or the FHP3 (hit symbol B) normal figure fluctuation display as an opportunity, and the hit symbol A, which is the premise of the V-passing small hit game, is used. It is an effect of whether or not the corresponding auxiliary game (long open auxiliary game) can be executed (an effect of applying the long open of the electric chew 23). The second half of the challenge production to V is performed with the special figure 2 variable display that is performed when the game ball enters the electric chew 23 in the auxiliary game according to the hit symbol A, and basically the small hit game is performed. It is an effect of whether or not it can be executed (an effect of passing through V). Here, with reference to FIG. 25, the production flow of the challenge production to V will be described.

Challenge to V In the first half of the production, the FHP2 (hit symbol A) normal map fluctuation display or the FHP3 (hit symbol B) normal map fluctuation display (hereinafter, these normal map fluctuation displays are referred to as "specific normal map fluctuation display"). It is performed when it is being performed, but when the specific normal map fluctuation display is started, it is paraphrased whether or not the challenge effect to V is executed before the first half of the challenge effect to V is performed. For example, a precursor effect (with a challenge effect on V) suggesting that a challenge effect on V may be executed is performed. In addition, when the precursor effect is performed with the start of the specific normal map fluctuation display, the challenge effect to V is always performed after that, but the precursor effect is usually accompanied by the start of the A loss fluctuation or the normal B loss fluctuation. Is also executed. However, in this case, the challenge effect to V is not executed after the precursor effect. That is, even if the precursory effect is performed, the challenge effect to V is not always executed. This is because if the challenge effect to V is always performed after the precursor effect is performed, it becomes clear that the challenge effect to V is performed by executing the precursor effect, and the effect of the precursor effect is performed. This is because the effect is reduced. In the following, a precursor effect that is executed even when the normal A loss fluctuation or the normal B loss fluctuation is started and the challenge effect to V is not performed after that is referred to as a “precursor effect”.

After the precursory production, when the first half of the challenge production to V is performed, the first challenge production is performed first. The first challenge production is a production of whether or not the first challenge can be cleared (whether the first challenge succeeds or fails). If the first challenge is successful, it is possible to proceed to the second half of the challenge production to V, and if the first challenge fails, it is not possible to proceed to the second half of the challenge production to V, and the challenge production to V ends. After the normal map fluctuation display, the electric chew 23 opens for a long time. In the normal map fluctuation display of FHP2, the first half of the challenge production to V (successful in the first half of the challenge production to V) is performed, and the normal map fluctuation display Later, in the FHP3 normal map variation display in which the electric chew 23 is short-opened, the first half of the challenge effect to V, which fails the first challenge (the first half of the challenge effect to V fails) is performed.

In the success of the first half of the challenge production to V, when the first challenge production is completed, the electric chew launch promotion production that prompts the game ball to be fired toward the electric chew 23 is subsequently performed. This is because the electric chew 23 is long-opened (a long opening auxiliary game is performed) after the start of the electric chew firing promotion effect, so that the player does not miss the opportunity to long-open the electric chew 23. The electric chew firing promotion effect is performed in the normal map variation display of FHP2 (hit symbol A), but is also performed in the long opening assist game performed after the normal map variation display. That is, the electric chew firing promotion effect is performed over the FHP2 (hit symbol A) normal map variation display and the long opening auxiliary game. In other words, the electric chew firing promotion effect starts before the end of the normal map variation display of FHP2 (hit symbol A) and ends in the middle of the long opening assist game.

In the long opening auxiliary game, if the game ball cannot enter the electric chew 23, the electric chew non-winning effect is performed according to the failure to enter the ball, and the challenge to V is performed in the first half (challenge to V). (Direction) is finished.

In the long opening auxiliary game, when a game ball enters the electric chew 23, the special figure 2 variable display is executed based on the ball entry, and the second half of the challenge production to V is performed according to the special figure 2 variable display. Will be Then, between the first half of the challenge production for V and the second half of the challenge production for V, a connecting production is performed to connect those productions. The connecting effect is composed of a connecting effect during the auxiliary game that is performed first, and a special figure 1 variable connecting effect that can be executed after the connecting effect during the auxiliary game.

The connecting effect during the auxiliary game is performed when the game ball enters the electric chew 23, and is performed until the long open auxiliary game is completed. The joint effect during the special figure 1 fluctuation is performed from the end of the long opening assist game until the start condition of the special figure 2 variable display is satisfied thereafter. The start condition of the special figure 2 variable display is that the special figure 1 variable display and the special game are not performed, or when the special figure 1 hold number is 1 or more, the special figure 1 variable display currently being executed ends. It is to be. If the start condition of the special figure 2 variable display is satisfied before the end of the long opening auxiliary game, the special figure 2 variable display is started immediately after the game ball enters the electric chew 23. Auxiliary game connecting effect and special figure 1 No connecting effect during fluctuation.

When the second half of the challenge production to V is performed, the last challenge production is performed first. The last challenge production is a production of whether or not the last challenge (basically) can be cleared (whether the final challenge succeeds or fails). If the final challenge (last challenge) is successful, a small hit game is performed, so a VAT launch promotion effect that promotes the launch of the game ball to the VAT33 is performed, and the latter half of the challenge effect to V ends. If the final challenge fails, the second half of the challenge production to V will end with the end of the special figure 2 variation display, and the revival challenge production will be performed without immediately ending the special figure 2 variation display. Branch to.

In the resurrection challenge production, it is a production of whether or not the final challenge can be cleared (exceptionally) (whether the final challenge succeeds or fails). If the final challenge (last challenge) is really successful, a small hit game will be performed, so the VAT launch promotion effect will be performed, and the second half of the challenge effect to V will end. If the final challenge fails, the latter half of the challenge production to V ends with the end of the special figure 2 variable display.

In this way, in the latter half of the challenge production to V, the final challenge may succeed or fail, but regardless of the presence or absence of the resurrection challenge production, the challenge to V that finally succeeds in the final challenge The latter half of the production is referred to as "the success of the second half of the challenge production to V", and the latter half of the challenge production to V, which finally fails in the final challenge, is referred to as "the second half of the challenge production to V failure". In addition, the success of the second half of the challenge production to V where the resurrection challenge production is not performed is called "the second half success of the challenge production to normal V", and the success of the second half of the challenge production to V where the resurrection challenge production is performed is "revival". "Challenge to V Success in the second half". The failure of the second half of the challenge production to V where the resurrection challenge production is not performed is called "the second half failure of the challenge production to normal V", and the failure of the second half of the challenge production to V where the resurrection challenge production is performed is called "to the resurrection V". The second half of the challenge production failed. " The latter half of the challenge production for V, where the resurrection challenge production is not performed, is called the "second half of the challenge production for normal V", and the latter half of the challenge production for V, where the resurrection challenge production is performed, is the "challenge production for V". It is called "the second half". Then, the success of the second half of the challenge effect to V is performed by the special figure 2 variation display of the big hit fluctuation or the small hit variation, and the failure of the second half of the challenge effect to V is performed by the special figure 2 variation display of the loss variation.

As described above, the precursor effect and the first half of the challenge effect to V are performed in the normal figure variation display and the auxiliary game, and the second half of the challenge effect to V is performed in the special figure 2 variation display. The part where the normal map fluctuation display is performed in the first half of the production is also called "normal map fluctuation production", and the part where the auxiliary game is performed in the first half of the challenge production to V is also called "auxiliary game production". In addition, the latter half of the challenge production to V is also referred to as "special figure 2 variable production".

Next, a specific example of the challenge production for V will be described. As a premise of a specific example of the challenge effect to V, it is assumed that the game progresses (various events occur) as shown in the time chart shown in FIG. 37. First, as shown in FIG. 26 (A), the special figure 1 variation display is in progress (special figure 1 variation display (1) in FIG. It is assumed that the fluctuation display of the symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the fluctuation display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are performed, and the fluctuation icon HA1 is displayed. Further, it is assumed that the number of holdings in Special Figure 1 is 3, and the holding icons HA2 to HA4 in the normal mode are displayed. Further, at this time, it is assumed that the variable display of the normal map and the auxiliary game are not executed. Further, it is assumed that the special figure 1 determination result relating to the icons HA1 to HA4 is "loss without reach".

Then, in this situation, if the game ball passes through the left gate 281, a general map lottery is performed and the normal map variation display is started. If the result of the common map lottery here is a hit A or a hit B, a precursor effect is performed at the same time as the start of the normal map fluctuation display. As mentioned above, the precursory production is a production that challenges V. When the precursor effect is started, first, as shown in FIG. 26 (B), the display unit 7a switches from the daytime normal background image G100 to the precursor effect first background image G110 dedicated to the precursor effect. The effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the icons HA1 to HA4 are hidden. Further, along with the first background image G110 for the precursory effect, the title image G9 bordered with the characters representing the title associated with the challenge effect to V, "Challenge to V", is displayed. The mode of the first background image G110 for precursor effect is appropriately set, but in the first embodiment, it is composed of a red monochromatic background. Further, the title image G9 is composed of white.

Next, in the precursor effect, as shown in FIG. 26 (C), instead of the first background image G110 for the precursor effect, a second precursor effect dedicated to another precursor effect different from the first background image G110 for the precursor effect. The background image G111 is displayed. That is, the first background image G110 for precursor effect is switched to the second background image G111 for precursor effect. The mode of the second background image G111 for precursor effect is appropriately set, but in the first embodiment, it is composed of a blue monochromatic background.

Further, the display unit 7a displays the horizontally long rectangular reduced screen image G10 superimposed on the second background image G111 for precursor effect, and is displayed in the reduced screen image G10 until immediately before the reduced screen image G10. The first background image G110 for the precursor effect is displayed. That is, it seems that the first background image G110 for precursor effect has moved into the reduced screen image G10 with the display of the reduced screen image G10. As the drawing process here, the reduced screen image G10 and the first background image G110 for the precursor effect are displayed in a layer higher (surface layer side) than the second background image G111 for the precursor effect and the title image G9. That is, the second background image G111 for precursor effect and the title image G9 are not drawn (displayed) without the range of the reduced screen image G10 and the first background image G110 for precursor effect, but are drawn (displayed) in the reduced screen image G10. On the lower layer side, something is drawn (displayed) in the range of the reduced screen image G10 and the first background image G110 for precursor effect. As a result, the range overlapping the reduced screen image G10 of the second background image G111 for the precursor effect and the title image G9 and the first background image G110 for the precursor effect is hidden by the reduced screen image G10 and the first background image G110 for the precursor effect. There is.

As a result of displaying the reduced screen image G10 in this way, in the display unit 7a, a part of the display unit 7a displayed in the reduced screen image G10 and the entire display unit 7a on the lower layer side of the reduced screen image G10. Two display parts are formed, one is a part displayed in the range. In the following, the portion displayed in the reduced screen image G10 is referred to as a “special area”, and the portion displayed in the entire range of the display unit 7a on the lower layer side of the reduced screen image G10 is referred to as a “normal area”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (D), the reduced screen image G10 including the first background image G110 for precursor effect is reduced while moving from the state of FIG. 26 (C) so as to be attracted to the lower left corner. .. At this time, the title image G9 gradually appears as the reduced screen image G10 including the first background image G110 for precursor effect is reduced. Then, after the reduction of the reduced screen image G10 including the first background image G110 for the precursor effect has progressed to a predetermined degree (for example, a part (a fraction) of the title image G9 appears), the challenge effect to V is performed. Branch depending on whether it is executed or not. That is, the time when the reduced screen image G10 is reduced to a predetermined degree is a turning point of whether or not the challenge effect to V is executed after this precursor effect.

Here, when the challenge effect to V is executed, after the state as shown in FIG. 26 (D), the first background image G110 for the precursor effect is included as shown in FIG. 27 (A-1). However, the reduction of the reduced screen image G10 proceeds at a stretch to the extent that almost the entire title image G9 appears, and as shown in FIG. 27 (B-1), the bordered inside of the title image G9 is filled with red. Image G11 notifying that the challenge effect to V is executed (entering the challenge effect to V) (Challenge to V execution notification image G11: "Challenge to V" in FIG. 27 (B-1)) Is displayed. The reduction of the reduced screen image G10 progresses to the extent that almost the entire title image G9 appears, and the display of the notification image G11 for executing the challenge effect to V is executed (to V). It constitutes an effect (a challenge effect execution notification effect for V) that notifies that the player will enter the challenge effect of.

On the other hand, when the challenge effect to V is not executed, that is, when the precursor effect being executed is the precursor effect, the reduced screen image G10 is on the right as a whole after the state shown in FIG. 26 (D). The image is enlarged diagonally upward, and finally, as shown in FIG. 27 (A-2), after the reduced screen image G10 covers the entire range of the display unit 7a, the daytime normal background image G100 is produced. The symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the icons HA1 to HA4 are displayed. That is, the display unit 7a returns from the special state in which the special area and the normal area are formed to the original normal state. An effect of notifying that the enlargement of the reduced screen image G10 including the first background image G110 for the precursory effect (end of the special state of the display unit 7a) was a precursory effect (precursor effect). In other words, it constitutes an effect (a challenge effect to V non-execution notification effect) that notifies that the challenge effect to V is not executed (does not enter the challenge effect to V). In the specific example described here, since the special figure 1 variation display is performed at the timing when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 appear, the displayed effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 also change.

After the precursory production is over, the production proceeds as usual (as in the case where the precursory effect is not performed). Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 27 (B-2), at the timing of the stop display of the loss special figure, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 indicating the loss without reach are stopped and displayed. The variation icon HA1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 27 (C-2), with the start of the special figure 1 variation display (special figure 1 variation display (2) in FIG. 37), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small The fluctuation display of the symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed, and the icons HA1 to HA4 are shifted one by one to the left.

As shown in FIGS. 26 (B) to 26 (D), from the appearance of the reduced screen image G10 to the branch point where the reduction of the reduced screen image G10 has progressed to a predetermined degree to hide a part of the title image G9. Consists of the precursory production. Further, the state in which the reduced screen image G10 as shown in FIG. 26D is reduced to a predetermined degree is maintained for a predetermined time (2 seconds in the first embodiment). By this maintenance, the reduced screen image G10 is further reduced, and it is fueled whether or not it is possible to enter the challenge effect to V.

When the execution notification effect of the challenge effect to V is performed, the challenge effect to V, in detail, the first challenge effect of the first half of the challenge effect to V is entered. When the first challenge effect is entered, the second background image G111 for the precursor effect is switched to the background image G112 (background image G112 for the first challenge) dedicated to the first challenge effect. Further, when entering the first half of the challenge production to V, first, in the image G12 explaining the content of the first challenge, which is the production content of the first challenge production (first challenge content explanation image G12: FIG. 27 (C-1), " Transform into the First Challenge logo ") is displayed on the display unit 7a. In the first embodiment, it is set that the main character "logo" is transformed as the first challenge. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1), the untransformed main character "logo" is displayed in the background image G112 for the first challenge.

The first challenge content explanation image G12 is displayed in a plurality of kinds of colors. Red, green and white are set as the colors. The color representing the first challenge content explanation image G12 constitutes an effect mode (effect pattern: first challenge effect pattern) of the first challenge effect. The color of the first challenge content explanation image G12 is the degree of expectation that the first challenge will be successful, in other words, the degree of expectation that the winning symbol A will be a variable display of the normal figure (the degree of expectation for the execution of the long opening auxiliary game). ) Is suggested. The degree of expectation for the execution of the long opening assist game suggested by the color of the first challenge content explanation image G12 is higher in the order of red> green> white.

Here, on the condition that when the first half of the challenge effect to V is started, the special figure 1 hold number ≥ 1, or the special figure 1 hold number = 0 and the special figure 1 variable display is being displayed. The reduced screen image G10 displayed on the display unit 7a at the time of the challenge effect execution notification effect to V is continuously displayed (a special area is continuously formed). However, in the reduced screen image G10, after the challenge effect to V is started, the special figure variation effect and the hold effect to be performed on the display unit 7a when the challenge effect to V is not performed are performed. .. The special figure variation effect here does not include the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display. The variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display is not affected by those effects even during the execution of the precursor effect and the challenge effect to V, and in the special figure 1 corresponding small symbol area 71a. Will be executed.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1), in the reduced screen image G10, which is a special area, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are variablely displayed and the icons HA2 to HA4 are displayed from above the daytime normal background image G100. Is done. That is, when the latter half of the challenge effect to V is started, the display of the daytime normal background image G100, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the display of the icons HA2 to HA4 are in a smaller state than before the start of the precursor effect. Will be done. Then, in the normal region, the first half of the challenge effect to V is performed according to the variable display of the normal map, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed according to the variable display of the special figure 1. Further, although not shown, in the special figure variation effect, in addition to the special figure variation effect by the image, the special figure variation effect by the sound output from the speaker 67 and the frame lamp according to the special figure variation display. The special figure variation effect by the light emitted from 66 is also appropriately executed. Then, when the precursor effect is started during the special figure variation effect, the precursor effect by voice or light emission and the first half of the challenge effect to V are appropriately changed from the special figure variation effect by voice or light emission to the normal figure variation display. Will be done. In other words, regarding the sound effect and light emission effect, from the sound effect and light emission effect for the special figure change effect according to the special figure change display, to the normal figure change effect according to the normal figure change display (precursor effect / challenge effect to V first half) ) To switch to sound production or light emission production. In the first embodiment, the precursor effect by voice or light emission is executed, and the voice or light emission is switched from the special figure fluctuation effect to the precursor effect at the start of the precursor effect, but the precursor effect by voice or light emission is executed. Instead, the special figure fluctuation effect by voice and light emission is executed until the first half of the challenge effect to V is started, and for the voice and light emission, the first half of the challenge effect to V from the special figure change effect at the start of the first half of the challenge effect to V. It may be switched to.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (D-1), after the first challenge content explanation image G12 is erased, as shown in FIG. 28 (A), the main character "logo" in the background image G112 for the first challenge is displayed. You can add an effect that draws attention. In this way, after the effect that draws attention to the main character "logo" in the background image G112 for the first challenge is added, it is determined whether the first challenge succeeds or fails (the result of the first challenge is notified). Will be). That is, the point at which the effect that draws attention to the main character "logo" is added is the turning point of success or failure of the first challenge.

Here, if the first challenge is successful, specifically, if the main character "logo" is transformed, in other words, if the result of the general drawing lottery is A (FTP2 general map variation display). , As shown in FIG. 28 (B-1), the main character "logo" in the background image G112 for the first challenge was transformed, and as shown in FIG. 28 (C-1), the first challenge was successful (the main character "" An image G13 (first challenge success notification image G13) indicating that the “logo” has been transformed) is displayed. The display of the first challenge success notification image G13 constitutes an effect (first challenge success notification effect) for notifying that the first challenge related to the first half of the challenge effect on V is successful.

On the other hand, if the first challenge fails, specifically, if the main character "logo" does not transform, in other words, if the result of the general drawing lottery is B (FTP3 general map variation display), As shown in FIG. 28 (B-2), the reduced screen image G10 as a whole is oblique to the right as shown in FIG. 28 (C-2) without transforming the main character "logo" in the background image G112 for the first challenge. It expands upward. Finally, as shown in FIG. 28 (D-2), the reduced screen image G10 disappears while covering the entire range of the display unit 7a. In other words, the special area gradually erodes the normal area and eventually replaces the normal area and disappears. As described above, the enlargement of the reduced screen image G10 constitutes an effect (first challenge failure notification effect) for notifying that the first challenge related to the first half of the challenge effect for V is a failure. Further, while the first challenge failure notification effect is being performed, the special figure variation effect and the hold effect are being performed in the reduced screen image G10 (special area) except for the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3.

Further, in the specific example described here, the stop display of the loss special figure is performed in the situation of FIG. 28 (B-1) or FIG. 28 (B-2), and the reduced screen image G10 (correspondingly) In the special area of the display unit 7a), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 indicating the loss without reach are stopped and displayed, and the variable icon HA2 is erased. Then, as shown in FIG. 28 (C-1) or FIG. 28 (C-2), with the start of the special figure 1 variation display (special figure 1 variation display (3) in FIG. 37), the effect symbols EZ1 to The variation display of EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 starts, and the icons HA3 to HA4 shift to the left by one.

After the first challenge success notification effect, an auxiliary game (long open auxiliary game) is performed according to the winning symbol A, so that the player does not fail to put the game ball into the electric chew 23 (player). (In order not to miss the opportunity to acquire game profits), an effect of urging the launch of the game ball toward the electric chew 23 (electric chew launch promotion effect) is executed. When the electric chew launch promotion effect is started, the background image G112 for the first challenge is switched to the background image G113 for the electric chew launch promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 29 (A), the background image G14 for the electric chew launch promotion effect displays an image G14 (electric chew launch promotion image G14) for prompting the launch of the game ball toward the electric chew 23. The electric chew launch promotion image G14 is an image G141 (electric chew launch trajectory image G141) showing a trajectory in which a game ball is launched toward the electric chew 23, and an image G142 (electric chew position) for clearly indicating the position of the electric chew 23. Image G142), image G143 (electric chew aiming image G143) suggesting that the target to be entered (aiming of the launch of the game ball) is electric chew 23, and right-handed to enter the electric chew 23. It is composed of an image G144 (right-handed notification image G144 for electric chew) that notifies that it is necessary.

The electric chew launch promotion effect is performed from the normal map fluctuation display to the auxiliary game. Specifically, the electric chew launch promotion effect is started from a predetermined time (4 seconds in the first embodiment) before the normal map variation display ends, and the game ball is displayed on the electric chew 23 during the normal map variation display. The launch trajectory image G141 is displayed so as to trace the trajectory moving toward it. Then, when the auxiliary game is started, in addition to the electric chew launch trajectory image G141, the electric chew position image G142, the electric chew aiming image G143, and the right-handed notification image G144 are displayed.

Although not shown, the stop display of the lost special figure is performed while the electric chew firing promotion effect is being performed, and then the special figure 1 variable display (special figure 1 variable display (2) in FIG. 37). )) It is assumed that 3 has been started. Therefore, while the electric chew firing promotion effect is being performed, in the special area of the display unit 7a, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the loss without reach is performed along with the stop display of the loss special figure. , The variable icon HA2 is erased, and with the start of the special figure 1 variable display, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, and the icons HA3 to the icon HA4 are shifted one to the left. Further, in the normal area of the display unit 7a, the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 indicating the loss without reach is performed along with the stop display of the lost special figure, and the small symbols 1 are displayed with the start of the variable display. The variations of the symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are displayed, and the icons HA3 to HA4 are shifted to the left by one.

Then, when the game ball enters the electric chew 23 before the predetermined time (3 seconds in the first embodiment) when the auxiliary game ends, the execution of the special figure 2 determination and the special figure 2 variable display is confirmed. Therefore, as an effect of connecting until the next effect is performed, a connecting effect during the auxiliary game is performed until the end of the auxiliary game.

When the connecting effect during the auxiliary game is performed, the background image G113 for the electric chew firing promotion effect is switched to the background image G114 for the connecting effect during the auxiliary game. As shown in FIG. 29 (B-1), the entire screen of the background image G114 for connecting effect during the auxiliary game is configured to be dim as compared with the background images G100 to G102 for normal use and the background image G112 for first challenge. The main character "logo" that is transforming into the dim screen is displayed. Further, in the auxiliary game connecting effect, the game ball has entered the electric chew 23 on the background image G114 for the auxiliary game connecting effect in order to notify that the game ball has entered the electric cue 23. Image G15 (electric chew incoming ball notification image G15: “standby OK” in FIG. 29 (B-1)) is displayed. The display of the background image G114 for the auxiliary game connecting effect and the display of the electric chew incoming ball notification image G15 constitute the auxiliary game connecting effect.

If the game ball has not entered the electric chew 23 before the predetermined time (3 seconds in the first embodiment) when the auxiliary game ends, the special figure 2 determination and the special figure 2 variable display are performed at that time. Since it has not been confirmed, as shown in FIG. 29 (B-2), when the predetermined time (3 seconds in the first embodiment) before the end of the auxiliary game is reached, the background for the electric chew firing promotion effect The image G113 is switched to the background image G114 for the connecting effect during the auxiliary game, and the transformed main character "logo" is displayed. That is, a part of the connecting effect is performed during the auxiliary game.

If the game ball does not enter the electric chew 23 within a predetermined time (3 seconds in the first embodiment) until the auxiliary game is completed, as shown in FIG. 29 (C-2), the auxiliary game is in progress. The reduced screen image G10 is enlarged diagonally upward to the right as a whole from above the transforming hero character "logo" which is a part of the connecting effect. Finally, as shown in FIG. 29 (D-2), the reduced screen image G10 disappears while covering the entire range of the display unit 7a. In other words, the special area gradually erodes the normal area, eventually replacing the normal area and evolvingly disappearing. Such an enlargement of the reduced screen image G10 notifies that the game ball could not enter the electric chew 23 in the auxiliary game (long open auxiliary game) according to the winning symbol A (electric chew non-winning effect). Consists of.

If the game ball enters the electric chew 23 within a predetermined time (3 seconds) until the auxiliary game ends, the electric chew incoming ball notification image G15 is superimposed on the background image G114 for the connection effect during the auxiliary game. It is displayed (see FIG. 29 (B-1)). That is, the connecting effect during the auxiliary game is completed.

In the specific example described here, since the special figure 1 variation display is continuously executed at the end of the auxiliary game (special figure 1 variation display (4) in FIG. 37), the auxiliary game ends. Immediately after that, the special figure 2 determination and the special figure 2 variable display cannot be executed. If the special figure 1 variable display is performed when the auxiliary game ends, in other words, the special figure 2 variable display is executed from the time when the auxiliary game ends until the special figure 1 variable display ends. Until then, the next special figure 2 challenge effect to V according to the variable display will be performed in the latter half of the special figure 1 variable display. As described above, if the special figure 1 variable display is not performed at the end of the auxiliary game, the joint effect during the special figure 1 change is not executed.

When the special figure 1 variable connecting effect is started, as shown in FIG. 30 (A), the background image G114 for the auxiliary game connecting effect in the normal area of the display unit 7a shows the special figure 1 changing background. At the same time as switching to the image G115, the image G16 (special figure 2 variable display waiting notification image G16) for notifying that the special figure 2 is waiting until the variable display is started is displayed. In addition, in the background image G115 for the joint effect during the change of Special Figure 1, the image in which the transforming main character "logo" and the enemy character are confronting each other is displayed. Then, the variable display of the special figure 1 is completed, and as shown in FIG. 30 (A), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in the special area, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed in the normal area. When the variable icon HA4 is erased, the joint effect during the change in Special Figure 1 ends, and the second half of the challenge effect to V, in detail, the last challenge effect starts.

When the special figure 1 variable display is switched to the special figure 2 variable display and the latter half of the challenge effect to V is started, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), the latter half of the challenge effect to V corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display. Is performed in the normal area, so that the reduced screen image G10 is erased. That is, substantially, the display unit 7a returns from the special state having the special area and the normal area to the normal state. However, while the latter half of the challenge effect to V is being performed, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are not displayed. Further, since the special figure 2 variable display has been started, the display positions of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 move from the special figure 1 corresponding small symbol area 71a to the special figure 2 corresponding small symbol area 72a. That is, in the latter half of the challenge effect to V, the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variably displayed in the small symbol region 72a corresponding to the special figure 2.

Further, when the last challenge effect constituting the latter half of the challenge effect to V is started, the display unit 7a displays the background image G115 for the joint effect during the change in Special Figure 1 to the background image G116 dedicated to the last challenge effect (for the last challenge). It switches to the background image G116). In addition, an image G17 (image G17 for executing the second half of the challenge effect for V) that notifies that the latter half of the challenge effect for V has been executed (entered in the second half of the challenge effect for V) is superimposed on the background image G116 for the last challenge. Is displayed.

Subsequently, in the latter half of the challenge production to V, as shown in FIG. 30C, an image G18 explaining the content of the final challenge, which is the production content of the last challenge production (last challenge content explanation image G18: FIG. 30). In (C), "Last challenge defeat the enemy character") is displayed on the display unit 7a, and as shown in FIG. 30 (D), in the background image G116 for the last challenge, the girl character introducing the last challenge and The enemy character that is the opponent of the main character's confrontation is displayed. As the final challenge, it is set that the main character "logo" wins or loses the enemy character. Further, the display of the girl character and the enemy character shown in FIG. 30 (D) constitutes an introduction portion of the last challenge effect (last challenge introduction effect).

Then, in the background image G116 for the last challenge, a battle between the main character "logo" and the enemy character is unfolded, and as shown in FIG. 31 (A), when the enemy character is attacked by the main character "logo", after that, , There are cases where the enemy character is successful and cases where it is not successful. That is, the scene in which the enemy character shown in FIG. 31 (A) is attacked by the main character "logo" constitutes a turning point of success or failure in the final challenge.

Here, although not shown, a plurality of types of attacks are set as attacks against the enemy character of the main character. The attacks are set to attack with a sword, attack with a spear, and attack with a punch. The content of this attack constitutes the production mode (effect pattern: last challenge production pattern) of the last challenge production. Then, the content of the attack of the main character in the last challenge production suggests the degree of expectation that the final challenge will be successful, in other words, the degree of expectation for the execution of the special game (the degree of expectation for the execution of the special game). The expectation for special game execution suggested by the content of the attack is higher in the order of sword> spear> punch.

Then, if the final challenge is successful, the V-passing small hit game is performed after that, so that the image G19 (V-passing implied image G19) suggesting V-passing is displayed as shown in FIG. 31 (B-1). As shown in FIG. 31 (C-1), an image G20 (last challenge success notification image G20) is displayed, which notifies that the enemy character has been defeated and the final challenge has been successful. The display of the V-passing suggestion image G19 and the last challenge success notification image G20 constitutes an effect of notifying that the last challenge was successful (last challenge success notification effect). Subsequently, since the V-passing small hit game is performed, the image G21 (right-handed prior suggestion image G21:) suggesting in advance that the player should hit right in order not to miss the game ball entering the VAT33. In FIG. 32 (A), "Now, preparation for right-handed hitting") is displayed so that the player does not fail to insert the game ball into the VAT 33 as shown in FIG. 32 (B) (player). (In order not to miss the opportunity to acquire game profits), an effect of urging the launch of a game ball toward the VAT 33 (VAT launch promotion effect) is executed. When the VAT launch promotion effect is started, the background image G116 for the last challenge is switched to the background image G117 for the VAT launch promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 32 (B), the background image G117 for the VAT launch promotion effect displays an image G22 (VAT launch promotion image G22) that prompts the launch of the game ball toward the VAT 33. The VAT launch promotion image G22 includes an image G221 (VAT launch trajectory image G221) showing the trajectory of the game ball being launched toward the VAT 33, an image G222 (VAT position image G222) for clarifying the position of the VAT 33, and a ball entry. Image G223 (VAT aiming image G223) suggesting that the target (aiming of the launch of the game ball) is VAT33, and image G224 (for VAT) notifying that it is necessary to hit right in order to enter the VAT33. It consists of a right-handed notification image G224). In the VAT launch promotion effect, first, the VAT launch trajectory image G221 is displayed so as to trace the trajectory of the game ball moving toward the VAT 33, and then, in addition to the VAT launch trajectory image G221, the VAT position image. The G222, the VAT aiming image G223, and the right-handed notification image G224 for VAT are displayed.

Finally, the VAT launch promotion effect is switched to the effect of notifying the entry into the small hit game (small hit game entry effect). When the small hit game rush effect is started, the display unit 7a switches from the background image G117 for the VAT launch promotion effect to the background image G118 (background image 118 for the small hit game rush effect) dedicated to the small hit game rush effect. .. The background image 118 for the small hit game rush effect displays a title image G23 (big hit game title image G23: "BIG BONUS" in FIG. 32 (C)) representing a big hit game that can be progressively executed from the small hit game. Will be done.

Here, the VAT launch promotion effect and the small hit game rush effect are performed in the special figure 2 stop display. Therefore, the VAT launch promotion effect is started with the start of the special figure 2 stop display, and the small hit game rush effect is finished with the end of the special figure 2 stop display. Therefore, while the VAT launch promotion effect and the small hit game rush effect are being performed, the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 indicating the small hit winning are stopped and displayed (FIGS. 32 (B) to 32 (C)). reference).

On the other hand, if the final challenge is unsuccessful, as shown in FIG. 31 (B-2), in the background image G116 for the last challenge, an enemy character who has withstood the attack of the main character "logo" and is standing as a hero is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (A), blackout is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). Then, after this blackout, the production is developed in two patterns. In addition, the display of the enemy character standing in the Nio constitutes a production (last challenge failure notification production) for notifying that the last challenge has failed.

As the first pattern, after the blackout (FIG. 33 (A)), as shown in FIG. 33 (B-1), temporary stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 showing the loss is performed, and FIG. 33 As shown in (C-1), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 indicating the loss is performed. That is, since the special figure 2 variation display ends, the latter half of the challenge effect to V ends. As the second pattern, a resurrection challenge effect is performed after the blackout (FIG. 33 (A)). The revival challenge production is a production in which the final challenge is performed again after making it seem as if the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which indicate a loss, are displayed once the final challenge has failed. That is, since the special figure 2 variable display continues, the latter half of the challenge production to V does not end. When the resurrection challenge production is started, as shown in FIG. 33 (B-2), in the background image G116 for the last challenge, in the phrase telling the start of the resurrection challenge production (in FIG. 33 (B-2), "let me do it again". Please! ”) Is displayed, the last challenge introduction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 33 (C-2), and the number of final challenges to be performed next is displayed as shown in FIG. 33 (D-2). The image G24 (last challenge number notification image G24) is displayed, and the second last challenge effect is performed. Here, since it is the resurrection challenge production in the latter half of the first challenge production to V, the number of the last challenges is the second time, and the last challenge number notification image G24 represents the "second time" (Fig.). 33 (D-2) "2ND"). This is because, for example, when the ball is entered into the second starting port 22 for the first time in the auxiliary game, the special figure 1 variable display is not performed, and the special figure 2 is immediately after the ball is entered. If a game ball enters the second starting port 22 after the variable display starts and before the auxiliary game ends, the special figure 2 hold occurs, and the result of the special figure 2 variable display is lost. This is because the second half of the second challenge to V will be performed. After the second last challenge production is performed, as in the case of the first last challenge production, the final challenge is successful, the last mission success notification production, VAT launch promotion production, small hit game rush production. Is performed in order (FIG. 31 (B-1), FIG. 31 (C-1), FIGS. 32 (A) to 32 (C)), or the production symbol EZ1 showing a loss due to the failure of the final challenge. -Temporary stop display of EZ3, stop display of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 indicating loss are performed in order (FIGS. 31 (B-2), 33 (B-1) to 33 (C-). 1)).

Next, a precursor effect having a different effect content from the above-mentioned precursor effect will be described. For example, in the situation shown in FIG. 26 (A) described above, as shown in FIG. 34 (A), a small flying object image G1 appears from around the upper right corner of the display unit 7a and moves to the left in the horizontal direction. .. Next, as shown in FIG. 34 (B), when the small flying object image G1 approaches directly above the hold icon HA2, the flash image G2 is emitted from the small flying object image G1 toward the hold icon HA2. To do. That is, the effect of predicting change is performed. Then, unlike the case of the hold effect, the flash image G2 stops as if it collided with something in front of the hold icon HA2. Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (C), an image G25 suggesting that the challenge effect to V is performed from the position where the flash image G2 is stopped (Challenge effect suggestion image G25 to V: FIG. 34 (B)). "Challenge to V") appears and moves to the right side of the hold display area 73a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 35 (A), in the display unit 7a, the daytime normal background image G100 is switched to the precursory effect second background image G111, and the display unit 7a is superimposed and reduced on the precursor effect second background image G111. The screen image G10 is displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), the reduced screen image G10 is reduced while moving so as to be attracted to the lower left corner, and the reduced screen image G10 is reduced to the extent that almost the entire title image G9 appears. , The challenge effect execution notification image G11 to V is displayed so that the bordered inside of the title image G9 is filled with red, and the execution of the first half of the challenge effect to V is confirmed. Finally, as shown in FIG. 35 (C), the first half of the challenge production to V is entered. In this way, there is a case where the challenge effect to V is entered from the pending change notice. That is, the retention predictive effect that suggests that the pending change notice may be executed also constitutes the precursor effect that suggests that the challenge effect to V may be executed.

Further, in this case, the reduction of the reduced screen image G10 proceeds to a predetermined degree, stops once, is maintained for a predetermined time, and then proceeds to the extent that almost the entire title image G9 appears, as in the above-mentioned precursor effect. Rather than being performed in multiple stages, it proceeds to the end (until almost the entire title image G9 appears) in a short time at once. This is because the above-mentioned precursor effect keeps the reduction of the reduced screen image G10 for a predetermined time at the stage when the reduction of the reduced screen image G10 has progressed to a predetermined degree, so that the reduction further progresses and the first half of the challenge production to V is entered. On the other hand, in this precursory production, by making the small flying object image G1 appear, the challenge production suggestion image G25 to V appears and rushes into the first half of the challenge production to V. This is because it is also fueling whether or not. Therefore, whenever the challenge effect suggestion image G25 to V appears, the first half of the challenge effect to V is performed (see FIG. 35 (C)), and the display of the challenge effect suggestion image G25 to V is the challenge effect to V. It constitutes a production that suggests that it will be performed (a production that suggests a challenge to V). Further, in the specific example here, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), the reduction of the reduced screen image G10 progresses to the extent that almost the entire title image G9 appears, and the challenge effect execution notification image G11 to V is displayed. When this is done, the special figure 1 stop display is performed, so that the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the loss without reach is performed in the special area of the display unit 7a, and there is no reach in the normal area of the display unit 7a. The stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 indicating the loss is performed.

In the following, by maintaining the reduction of the reduced screen image G10 for a predetermined time at the stage when the reduction of the reduced screen image G10 has progressed to a predetermined degree, the reduction further progresses and it is a precursor to incite whether or not to enter the first half of the challenge production to V. The production is called "precursor effect A", and by making the small flying object image G1 appear (execute the retention predictive effect), the challenge effect suggestion image G25 for V appears and enters the first half of the challenge effect for V. It is called a precursory production "precursor production B" that incites whether or not to do it.

Further, as described above, the hold change notice may not be given after the hold change sign effect is performed, but either the hold change notice or the challenge effect to V is performed after the hold change sign effect is performed. May not be done. In this case, the small flying object image G1 moves to the left after appearing, but fades out from the upper left end of the display unit 7a without firing the right flash image G2. In this way, the maintenance change sign production in which the pending change notice or the challenge production to V is not performed after that is called the "hold change sign production Gase".

After the reduced screen image G10 appears, the special figure variation effect and the hold effect excluding the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are performed in the reduced screen image G10. That is, the special figure variation effect and the hold effect excluding the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are performed by changing the location to the reduced screen image G10 (special area of the display unit 7a).

Next, the regulation of the precursor effect A will be described. In the following, the unregulated precursor effect A will be referred to as "normal precursor effect A", and the regulated precursor effect A will be referred to as "regulated precursor effect A". If the precursor effect A is performed while the above is being performed, the execution of the precursor effect A is restricted (restricted), and the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is prioritized. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), the temporary stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 showing the loss without reach is performed, and when the stop display is to be performed, the game ball passes through the left gate 281 and is usually The precursor effect A is about to be started with the start of the figure variation display. In this case, as in the above-mentioned normal precursor effect A, the display unit 7a switches from the daytime normal background image G100 to the precursor effect first background image G110, and the effect symbols EZ1 to the effect symbol EZ3 are erased. Instead, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), the state in which the effect symbols EZ1 to the effect symbol EZ3 are superposed on the daytime normal background image G100 is maintained. Further, the reduced screen image G10 is displayed with the start of the normal map variation display, and the reduced screen image G10 is displayed at the same position and the same size as in the case of the challenge effect start notification effect for V. Then, in the reduced screen image G10 displayed here, that is, in the special area of the display unit 7a, the challenge effect execution notification effect for V is configured, and it is displayed in the normal area in the normal precursor effect A. The second background image G111 for precursor effect and the title image G9 (see FIGS. 26 (C), 26 (D), and 27 (A-1)) are displayed.

Then, when the special figure 1 variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 36 (C), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are erased in the normal area of the display unit 7a, and the variation display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 starts. The second background image G111 for precursor effect and the title image G9 that were displayed in the special area when the special figure 1 stop display was performed are displayed in the normal area, and the first background image for precursor effect is displayed in the special area. G110 is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (D), the challenge effect execution notification image G11 to V is displayed so that the bordered inside of the title image G9 is filled with red, and as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1). In the first half of the challenge production to V. As described above, in the prohibition sign effect A, unlike the normal precursor effect A, it does not incite whether or not it is possible to enter the first half of the challenge effect to V by reducing the reduced screen image G10. However, finally, as in the normal precursor effect A, in the normal area of the display unit 7a, the bordered inside of the title image G9 is painted in red from above the second background image G111 for precursor effect. The challenge effect execution notification image G11 to V is displayed, and the first background image G110 for precursor effect is displayed in the special area of the display unit 7a. Further, while the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and the execution of the precursor effect A is restricted, the reduced screen image G10 is displayed within a visible range of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3. It is suggested that the precursor effect A is performed by displaying the second background image G111 for the precursor effect and the title image G9 in the reduced screen image G10.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in addition to the special figure variation effect performed in the special figure 1 variation display, which is the variation display of a single symbol, the variation of the symbols different from the normal map variation display and the special figure 2 variation display. Since there is a series of effects (challenge effect to V) performed across the display, the variation of the effect according to the progress of the game (control of the game) increases, and the game interest is improved. Here, the first half of the challenge to V (especially the first challenge production) is performed in the normal map fluctuation display performed earlier, and the first half of the challenge to V (particularly the first challenge) is performed in the special figure 2 variation display performed later. Since the latter half of the challenge to V (especially the last challenge production), which is related to the content of the production, is performed as a continuation of the production), the fun of the production is increased and the production effect is improved.

Further, with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1, since it is difficult to open the second starting port 22 that generates the special figure 2 lottery, which is relatively easy to win the V-passing small hit in the normal gaming state, it is basically left-handed. The game ball is fired at, and the ball is entered into the first starting port 20 that generates the special figure 1 lottery, which is relatively difficult to win the V-passing small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display is repeated to win the big hit or the small hit. A game aiming for winning is performed. However, when the game ball passes through the left gate 281 while the game ball is being launched aiming at the first starting port 20 by left-handed, a normal game is drawn, and when the winning symbol A is won in the normal game. Despite the state, the long opening assist game is executed, and the second starting port 22 is opened for a time when the ball is easy to enter. When the ball is entered into the second starting port 22, a special drawing 2 lottery is performed. In the special figure 2 lottery, a small hit can be won with a higher probability than in the special figure 1 lottery. If you win a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery, a V-passing small hit game is performed, so basically you can pass V during the V-passing small hit game, execute the big hit game, and then enter the time saving state. .. Therefore, in the normal drawing lottery in the normal game state, the winning symbol A is won to execute the long opening assisting game, and the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 22 during the long opening assisting game, and the special drawing 2 lottery is performed. It is one of the characteristic game characteristics (the real pleasure) whether or not it is possible to enter the time saving state by winning the V-passing small hit and executing the V-passing small hit game. Therefore, in the normal map variation display related to the hit symbol A or the hit symbol B, the first half of the challenge effect (first challenge effect) to V with the long opening auxiliary game is performed, and then in the special figure 2 variation display, the V passing small hit is performed. The second half of the challenge production (last challenge production) for V with the game is being performed. That is, since the challenge production to V is performed according to the game playability that develops step by step, the game interest is improved.

Further, the special figure 2 variable display forming the latter half of the characteristic game playability is not executed unless the hit symbol A is derived in the normal figure variable display forming the first half. That is, even if the first half of the challenge effect to V is executed, the special figure 2 variable display cannot be executed depending on the display result of the normal figure variable display (the result of the first challenge in the first challenge effect). The challenge production for V ends in the first half of the challenge production for V (it is not possible to proceed to the second half of the challenge production for V). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the excitement of the player and improve the interest of the game. And, on the contrary, the special figure fluctuation effect according to the special figure 1 variable display, which is not directly related to the normal figure variable display (it is not executed progressively from the normal figure variable display), and the normal figure change. A series of productions related to the production content, such as a challenge production to V, are not executed across the production and the auxiliary game production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect.

Further, in the time-saving state in which the second starting port 22 is easily opened and the digestion cycle of the special figure 2 hold is fast, a series of effects is not executed across the normal figure variation display and the special figure 2 variation display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect from being complicated and the effect from being reduced.

Still, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal map fluctuation effect (precursor effect and the first half of the challenge to V) is performed larger (in a wide range) than the special figure variation effect according to the special figure 1 variation display. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the variable effect. In this case, since the special figure variation effect performed on the display unit 7a is reduced, it is possible to further prevent the effect of the normal figure variation effect from being lowered and improve the game entertainment. Further, when the normal map variation effect, more specifically, the precursor effect performed at the beginning of the normal map variation effect is started, the reduced screen image G10 is displayed on the display unit 7a, and the display unit 7a has a relatively large normal area. And a small special area are formed, and in the normal area, the normal figure variation effect is performed instead of the special figure variation effect according to the special figure 1 variation display, and instead, the special figure 1 variation display is performed in the special area. A special figure fluctuation effect is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the normal figure variation effect and the special figure variation effect from coexisting, and to prevent the effect from being lowered.

In addition, when the challenge effect to V (normal figure change effect and special figure 2 variable effect corresponding to special figure 2 variable display) is started, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 included in the special figure lottery effect are variablely displayed. Is reduced and moved to the special area of the display unit 7a, but the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is the same size as before the challenge effect to V is executed even if the challenge effect to V is executed. Moreover, since it is performed at the same position, it is possible to easily understand the execution status of the special figure 1 variable display.

Further, if the precursor effect is started while the special figure 1 variation display is being performed, the reduced screen image G10 is displayed in the range in which the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 on the display unit 7a is performed. The effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that were displayed in a variable manner are erased. However, while the special figure 1 stop display indicating the special figure lottery result is being performed, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is prioritized and the precursor effect is regulated. Specifically, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the reduced screen image G10 is displayed in a range in which the contents of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that are stopped and displayed can be easily visually recognized (stop). A precursor effect is executed so that the contents of the displayed effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 can be easily visually recognized). In this way, by giving priority to the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 and restricting the precursory effect, it is possible to surely notify the player of the special figure 1 lottery result and prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, if the precursor effect is started while the special figure 1 variable display is being performed, the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that have been variablely displayed are deleted, thereby preventing the effect of the precursor effect from being lowered. be able to. Further, since the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are variably displayed at the same size and position as before the execution of the precursor effect even when the precursor effect is executed, it is easy to understand the execution status of the special figure 1 variable display. can do.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, after the small flying object image G1 appears and the maintenance change predictive effect of moving to the left is performed, the first half of the challenge effect to V is executed without the pending change notice. There are times. In other words, the predictive effect of the change, which suggests that there is a possibility that a notice of pending change will be given, also serves as a precursory effect that fuels whether or not to enter the first half of the challenge effect to V. In this way, when the small flying object image G1 appears and moves to the left, there is a possibility that the first half of the challenge effect to V (normal figure variation effect) is executed in addition to the pending change notice. Since there are a plurality of destinations for the production in this way, the fun of the production is increased, and the interest in the game is improved. Moreover, the pending change notice, which is one of the deployment destinations, suggests the expectation of a big hit, and the first half of the challenge production to V, which is the other deployment destination, suggests the expectation for the execution of the long opening auxiliary game, so the gameplay is complicated. It will be converted and the game entertainment will be further improved. Further, the pending change notice is not the jackpot expectation for the special figure 1 variable display currently being executed, but the jackpot expectation for the special figure 1 variable display that has not been started yet and will be executed in the future. The complexity of the game will increase, and the game will be more enjoyable.

Further, in the normal game state, when the game ball enters the second starting port 22 while the special figure 1 variation display and the long opening assist game are being executed, a predetermined time is subsequently performed in the normal area of the display unit 7a. Since the auxiliary game during the auxiliary game, which connects the steps up to the effect (for example, the special figure 1 fluctuating joint effect), the monotonousness of the game can be reduced and the deterioration of the game interest can be prevented. In addition, if the game ball does not enter the second starting port 22 during the auxiliary game, the electric chew non-winning effect is executed according to the failure to enter the ball, so that the player is in the long open auxiliary game. Can be made aware that the ball could not be entered into the second starting port 22.

Further, when a predetermined effect performed in the normal area of the display unit 7a starts after the game ball enters the second start port 22 during the long opening auxiliary game, the connection effect during the auxiliary game ends, that is, the display unit. In the normal region of 7a, since the predetermined effect is switched from the connecting effect during the auxiliary game, it is possible to prevent the effect of the predetermined effect from being lowered.

Further, during the long opening assist game, the electric chew firing promotion effect is performed in the normal area of the display unit 7a, but when the game ball enters the second starting port 22 at that time, the special figure 1 variation display is being executed. If so, it will switch from the electric chew launch promotion production to the connection production during the auxiliary game. Here, since the upper limit value of the special figure 2 hold is "1", if the game ball is set to the electric chew 23 during the auxiliary game, the special figure 2 hold cannot be increased even if the ball is entered any more. Therefore, if the game ball is changed to the electric chew 23 during the auxiliary game, the necessity of promoting the entry into the electric chew 23 is reduced. That is, the timing at which the necessity of promoting the entry into the electric chew 23 is reduced coincides with the timing at which the electric chew firing promotion effect is switched to the connecting effect during the auxiliary game. In this way, the effect is switched according to the change in the game situation, so that the effect is further improved.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 22 during a long auxiliary game when the special figure 1 variation display is performed, a special figure 2 hold occurs, and the long open auxiliary game ends. When the special figure 1 variation display continues, the special figure variation effect according to the special figure 2 variation display based on the special figure 2 hold from the connection effect during the auxiliary game with the end of the long opening auxiliary game ( Special figure 1 to connect to the challenge production to V) Since it is switched to the connection production during fluctuation, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

Further, when the long opening assist game is performed but the special figure 1 variable display is not performed, the game ball enters the second starting port 22 and the variable display of the special figure 2 is immediately started. , Special figure 2 During the change display, the special figure change effect (the latter half of the challenge effect to V) is performed without performing the auxiliary game during the connection effect and the special figure 1 during the change display. FIG. 1 It is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the connecting effect during fluctuation and the special figure variation effect (the latter half of the challenge effect to V).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special symbol stop time for the small hit symbols (small hit symbols 2A to small hit symbols 2C) related to the special figure 2 lottery is longer in the normal game state than in the time saving state. Here, the small hit symbol related to the special figure 2 lottery is a V-passing small hit, and the special figure 2 lottery is easier to win the V-passing small hit, but in the normal gaming state, the second starting port 22 is open. Because it is difficult, the V-passing small hit game is rarely executed. Therefore, even if the V-passing small hit game is executed in the normal game state, if the player misses the opportunity, the disadvantage suffered by the player is large. Therefore, by relatively lengthening the special symbol stop time for the small hit symbols (small hit symbols 2A to small hit symbols 2C) related to the special figure 2 lottery in the normal game state, the V-passing small hit game in the normal game state. Since it is possible to reduce the disadvantage suffered by the player by making it difficult to miss the opportunity, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest. Further, in the time saving state, the second starting port 22 is easy to open, and the special figure 2 lottery is easier to win a small hit. Therefore, basically, the game ball is fired aiming at the second starting port 22. FIG. 2 A game of drawing lots is performed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the small hit symbols (small hit symbols 2A to small hit symbols 2C) according to the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed at a higher frequency than in the normal game state. Therefore, in the time saving state, by relatively shortening the special symbol stop time for the small hit symbols (small hit symbols 2A to small hit symbols 2C) related to the special figure 2 lottery, the progress of the game is smoothed and the game is enjoyed. Can be prevented from decreasing.

Further, in the small hit game, since the VAT 33 is opened, the player can make a small hit by performing the VAT launch promotion effect in the stop display of the small hit symbols 2A to 2C performed before the V passing small hit game. It is possible to prevent the player from failing to enter the VAT 33 during the game and reduce the disadvantage suffered by the player. Further, under the condition that the distribution device 36 operates in a certain mode from the start of the small hit game, the small hit opening time of the V-passing small hit game is set short in order to advance the game at a good tempo during the time saving state. ing. Therefore, if the V-passing small hit game is started in the normal game state, the VAT 33 is opened immediately, so that the player cannot pass the V at the opportunity of the V-passing small hit game. Therefore, by lengthening the special figure determination time for the small hit symbol related to the special figure 2 lottery in the normal game state, it is possible to secure the time from the start of the stop display of the small hit symbol to the start of the VAT33. Further, by performing the VAT launch promotion effect during the stop display of the small hit symbol for a long time, the player can surely enter the game ball into the VAT 33.

5. Game control by the game control microcomputer 81 [Main control main processing]
Next, the game control by the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 56. The counter, timer, flag, status, buffer, etc. that appear in the game control by the game control microcomputer 81 described below are provided in the RAM 84. Further, the initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1". When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 38 from the ROM 83. As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, first, the power-on process (S001) is performed. In the power-on processing, access permission setting to RAM 84, CPU 82 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time) and the like are set.

Following the power-on processing, interrupts are disabled (S002), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S003) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003), the counter values of various random numbers shown in FIGS. 7 (A) and 7 (B) are added and updated by 1. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of the counter of each random number may be a value other than "0" or may be changed at random. Further, at least a part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, interrupts are enabled (S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU 82 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, the main timer interrupt process (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, between the end of the main timer interrupt process (S005) and the start of the next main timer interrupt process (S005), various normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processes (S003) are used. The random number counter value update process is repeatedly executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S004).

[Main timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the main timer interrupt process (S005), the output process (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), commands and the like set in the output buffer provided in the RAM 84 of the main control board 80 are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like in each process described below.

In the input process (S102) performed after the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 81 also takes in the detection signal from the lower plate full switch that detects the fullness of the lower plate 62, and outputs the RAM 84 as the lower plate full data. Store in the buffer.

The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the main control main process of FIG. 38. That is, the counter value update processing of various random numbers shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B includes the execution period of the main timer interrupt processing (S005) and other periods (main timer interrupt processing (main side timer interrupt processing) It is performed both after the end of S005) and until the next main timer interrupt process (S005) is started).

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the sensor detection process (S104), then the normal operation process (S105), and further performs the special operation process (S106). Do. The sensor detection process, normal operation process, and special operation process will be described later.

Following the special operation process (S106), a distribution device control process for controlling the distribution device 36 is performed (S107). The sorting device control process will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes other processing (S108) to end the main timer interrupt processing (S005). Other processes (S108) include power failure monitoring processing when the power is turned off, updating the timer provided in the RAM 84, and the like. In addition, as another process (S108), a payout control process for paying out prize balls to the player is performed. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first starting port 20, the prize ball counter for the second starting port 22, the prize ball counter for the first large winning opening 30, and the prize ball counter for the second large winning opening 32. , And, it is checked whether or not the prize ball counter for the general winning opening 27 exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", the prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 110. Then, when the prize ball signal is transmitted, the update process of subtracting "1" from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

Then, the game control microcomputer 81 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S002 to S004 of the main control main process until the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU 82 (see FIG. 38), and when the interrupt pulse is input (see FIG. 38). After about 4 msec), the main timer interrupt process (S005) is executed again. In the output process (S101) of the main side timer interrupt process (S005) that is executed again, the game control microcomputer 81 issues a command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM 84 in the previous main side timer interrupt process (S005). Output.

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, the sensor detection process will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening 27, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the general winning opening sensor 27a (S201). If no game ball has won in the general winning opening 27 (NO in S201), the process proceeds to step S203, and if a game ball has won in the general winning opening 27 (YES in S201), a predetermined number of game balls have been entered. Performs general prize opening prize ball processing for paying out prize balls (S202). In the general winning opening prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (“3” in the first embodiment) corresponding to the winning of the general winning opening 27 is added to the winning ball counter for the general winning opening 27.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the left gate sensor 281a or the right gate sensor 282a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S203), the process proceeds to step S206. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S203), whether or not the normal map operation status described later = 1, in other words, whether or not the normal map variable display or the auxiliary game is performed. Judge whether or not (S204). If the normal figure operation status is not 1 (NO in S204), the process proceeds to step S206, and if the normal figure operation status = 1 (YES in S204), the normal symbol random number counter (label-TRND-F) The normal symbol random number indicated by the counter value and the winning symbol type random number indicated by the counter value of the winning symbol random number counter (label-TRND-AS) are acquired, and the acquired ordinary symbol random number and the winning symbol type random number are provided in the RAM 84. Store it in the random number storage unit (S205), and proceed to step S206.

In step S206, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second start port 22, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second start port sensor 22a. If the game ball has not won in the second starting port 22 (NO in S206), the process proceeds to step S213, and if the game ball has won in the second starting port 22 (YES in S206), the game ball is designated. The second starting opening prize ball processing for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S207). In the second starting port prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (“4” in the first embodiment) corresponding to the winning of the second starting port 22 is added to the prize ball counter for the second starting port 22.

Next, whether the special figure 2 hold number (specifically, the numerical value of the special figure 2 hold number counter (special figure 2 hold number counter) provided in the RAM 84) is "1" (upper limit storage number) or more. Determine if not (S208). If the number of special figure 2 hold is "1" or more (YES in S208), the process proceeds to step S213, but if the number of special figure 2 hold is not "1" or more (less than "1"), ( NO) in S208, special figure 2 hold number addition processing is performed (S209). In the special figure 2 hold number addition process, the special figure 2 hold number counter is added by "1", and the special figure 2 hold number indicated by the special figure 2 hold indicator 432 is increased by "1".

Next, a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-AS), a small hit symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-KS), and a reach random number counter (label-TRND-). The special figure 2 related random number including the RC) and the special figure variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-THP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related random number buffer provided in the RAM 84 (S210).

Next, the second start winning command specifying process is performed (S211). In the second start winning command specifying process, the starting winning command specifying table for the second starting port shown in FIG. 13 is collated with the current gaming state and the special figure 2 related random number acquired in step S210 to win the second starting winning. The command is specified, and the specified second start winning command is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 stores the special figure 2 related random numbers acquired in step S210 in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 852 (S212).

Subsequently, in step S213, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 20, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 20a. If the game ball has not won the first starting port 20 (NO in S213), the process proceeds to step S220, and if the game ball has won the first starting port 20 (YES in S213), the game ball is designated. The first starting opening prize ball processing for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S214). In the first start port prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (“4” in the first embodiment) corresponding to the winning of the first start port 20 is added to the prize ball counter for the first start port 20.

Next, the special figure 1 hold number (specifically, the numerical value of the counter (special figure 1 hold number counter) for counting the number of special figure 1 hold provided in the RAM 84) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more. Whether or not (S215). If the special figure 1 hold number is "4" or more (YES in S215), the process proceeds to step S220, but if the special figure 1 hold number is not (less than) "4" or more (NO in S215). ), Special figure 1 Hold number addition processing is performed (S216). In the special figure 1 hold number addition process, the special figure 1 hold number counter is added by "1", and the special figure 1 hold number indicated by the special figure 1 hold indicator 431 is increased by "1".

Next, a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-AS), a small hit symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-KS), and a reach random number counter (label-TRND-). The special figure 1 related random number including the RC) and the special figure variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-THP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related random number buffer provided in the RAM 84 (S217).

Next, the first start winning command specifying process is performed (S218). In the first start winning command specifying process, the starting winning command specifying table for the first starting port shown in FIG. 13 is collated with the current gaming state and the special figure 1 related random number acquired in step S217, and the first starting winning is won. The command is specified, and the specified first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 stores the special figure 1 related random number acquired in step S217 in the storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 hold in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 851 (S219).

In step S220, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won in the first large winning opening 30, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first large winning opening sensor 30a. If the game ball has not won in the first big winning opening 30 (NO in S220), the process proceeds to step S224, and if the game ball has won in the first big winning opening 30 (YES in S220), the RAM 84 is entered. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the provided large winning opening winning counter is "9" or more (S221). The big winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings in the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 32 in one round game of the big hit game. In addition, the big winning opening winning counter is cleared every time each round game is completed. In the first embodiment, the number of winning prizes is set to "9". Therefore, the process of step S221 is performed.

If the counter value of the big prize opening prize counter is "9" or more (YES in S221), the process proceeds to step S224, and the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is not "9" or more, that is, less than "9". And (NO in S221), the counter value of the big prize opening prize counter is added by "1" (S222), and the first big winning opening prize ball processing for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player is performed (S223). ), Proceed to step S224. In the first prize-winning opening prize ball processing, the number of prize balls according to the winning of the first prize-winning opening 30 is added to the prize-ball counter for the first large-winning opening 30 (“14” in the first embodiment). Is added.

In step S224, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second special winning opening 32, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second large winning opening sensor 32a. If the game ball has not won in the second big winning opening 32 (NO in S224), the process proceeds to step S228, and if the game ball has won in the second big winning opening 32 (YES in S224), the big winning It is determined whether or not the counter value of the winning prize counter is "9" or more (S225).

If the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is "9" or more (YES in S225), the process proceeds to step S228, and the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is not "9" or more, that is, less than "9". And (NO in S225), the counter value of the big prize opening prize counter is added by "1" (S226), and the second big winning opening prize ball processing for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player is performed (S227). ), Proceed to step S228. In the second prize-winning opening prize ball processing, the number of prize balls according to the winning of the second prize-winning opening 32 is added to the prize-ball counter for the second big winning opening 32 (“14” in the first embodiment). Is added.

In step S228, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 34 (enters the specific area 34), that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 34a. If the game ball has not passed through the specific area 34 (NO in S228), the sensor detection process is completed, and if the game ball has passed through the specific area 34 (YES in S228), is the V valid period? Judge whether or not (S229). The V valid period is a period set in step S2005 in the sorting device control process (see FIG. 56) described later. If it is not during the V valid period (NO in S229), the sensor detection process is completed, and if it is during the V valid period (YES in S229), V passes according to the passage (V passage) of the specific area 34 in the V valid period. The process is performed (S230), and the sensor detection process is terminated. In the V pass processing, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag indicating that the game ball has passed the specific area 34 (enters the specific area 34) in the predetermined area of the RAM 84 during the V valid period, and sets the V pass command. Was set in the output buffer, and a jackpot was won (two types of jackpots) by passing V during the small hit game. Set in a predetermined area.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, the normal operation processing related to the control of the normal figure display 42 and the electric chew 23 will be described. As shown in FIG. 43, the processing related to the normal figure display 42 and the electric chew 23 is divided into four statuses (stages). Then, "normal operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 81 first confirms the "normal operation status" in the normal operation process (S105) (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", the normal symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", the normal symbol variation process (S1103) is performed. When the "normal operation status" is "3", the normal symbol determination process (S1104) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "4", the auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. The "normal operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process performed during standby when the variable display of the normal diagram and the auxiliary game are not performed. The normal symbol standby process will be described later.

The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process performed when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The normal symbol variation processing will be described later.

The normal symbol confirmation process (S1104) is a process performed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. The normal symbol determination process will be described later.

The auxiliary game control process (S1105) is a process performed when the auxiliary game is being performed. The auxiliary game control process (S1105) will be described later.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 44, in the normal symbol standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not a random number related to a normal symbol is stored (S1201). If the normal figure-related random number is not stored (NO in S1201), the normal symbol standby process is terminated, and if the normal figure-related random number is stored (YES in S1201), the normal figure determination process (S1202) is performed.

In the game control microcomputer 81, in the normal figure determination process (S1202), the ordinary symbol random numbers in the stored normal symbol related functions are read out, and based on the hit determination table (see FIG. 8 (A)), the result is correct or not. Judgment (hit judgment) is performed. If the result of the hit determination is "missing", the lost normal map data representing the loss is set in the normal map buffer of the RAM 84. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is "hit", the random number of the hit symbol type in the stored general figure-related function is read out, and based on the hit symbol type determination table (see FIG. 8 (B)), Judging the type of hit symbol Performs the hit symbol type judgment. When this determination is made, the hit normal figure data representing the type of the hit symbol is set in the normal figure buffer of the RAM 84.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is currently in the normal game state (non-time saving state) (S1203). If it is in the normal game state (YES in S1203), select the normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table for the normal game state (S1204) and proceed to step S1206, and if it is not in the normal game state (NO in S1203), the normal for the time saving state. Figure The fluctuation pattern determination table is selected (S1205), and the process proceeds to step S1206.

In step S1206, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the normal map fluctuation pattern. Specifically, in the normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment table selected in step S1204 or step S1205, the stop normal figure (missing normal figure, hit symbol A, hit symbol B, hit symbol C) which is the normal figure judgment result in step S1202 is displayed. ) Is collated to determine the normal map fluctuation pattern.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the normal map fluctuation start command indicating the normal map fluctuation pattern determined in step S1206 in the output buffer of the RAM 84 (S1207), and responds to the normal map fluctuation pattern determined in step S1206. The normal symbol fluctuation time is set in the normal operation timer (S1208), and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol of the normal chart fluctuation time is started on the normal symbol display 42 (S1209). The timer for normal operation is updated in another process (S108) of FIG. 39.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 erases the random numbers related to the normal figure (clears the normal figure storage unit) (S1210), changes the normal operation status to "2" (S1211), and ends the normal symbol standby process. ..

[Processing during normal symbol change]
As shown in FIG. 45, in the normal symbol variation processing (S1103), the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the normal symbol, that is, after starting the normal symbol variation display, in step S1208. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the microcomputer set in the normal operation timer has elapsed (S1251). When not ending the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (NO in S1251), when ending the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and ending the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (YES in S1251), the normal symbol display 42 was determined in step S1202. Set the normal operation stop display (S1252), set the time required for the normal figure stop display (normal figure confirmation time: 0.5 seconds in the first embodiment) to the normal operation timer (S1253), and set the normal operation timer (S1253). The normal symbol fluctuation stop command indicating that the fluctuation display is stopped is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84 (S1254), the normal operation status is changed to "3" (S1255), and the normal symbol fluctuation processing is terminated.

[Normal symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 46, in the normal symbol determination process (S1104), the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the normal symbol, that is, starts the stop display of the normal symbol (variation of the normal symbol). After the display is finished), it is determined in step S1253 whether or not the normal operation timer set in the normal operation timer has elapsed (S1301). If the normal symbol confirmation time has not passed (NO in S1301), the normal symbol confirmation process has ended, and if the normal symbol confirmation time has passed (YES in S1301), whether or not the winning symbol is currently stopped and displayed. Is determined (S1302). If the winning symbol is not stopped and displayed (NO in S1302), the normal operation status is changed to "1" (S1305) in order to execute the variable display of the new normal symbol, and the normal symbol confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if the winning symbol is stopped and displayed (YES in S1302), the auxiliary game preparation process for starting the auxiliary game is performed (S1303), and the normal operation status is changed to "4" in order to execute the auxiliary game. Then (S1304), the normal symbol confirmation process is completed. In the auxiliary game preparation process, an auxiliary game control table (TBL No. 4-1 to 4-3: see FIG. 8D) according to the current game state and the winning symbol type is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 84, and a predetermined area is set. The OP time is set in the timer for normal operation, and the number of times the electric chew 23 is opened is set in the electric chew open remaining number counter provided in the RAM 84. This is to grasp the number of times the electric chew 23 is opened in the auxiliary game.

[Auxiliary game control processing]
As shown in FIG. 47, in the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the hit ending flag indicating that the auxiliary game is ending is ON (S1351). .. If the hit ending flag is ON (YES in step S1351), the process proceeds to step S1362, and if the hit ending flag is not ON (NO in step S1351), the electric chew 23 (second starting port 22) is open. Judge whether or not (S1352). If the electric chew 23 is open (YES in S1352), the process proceeds to step S1355, and if the electric chew 23 is not open (NO in S1352), the time for opening the electric chew 23 (second starting port 22) ( It is determined whether or not the electric chew opening time), in other words, whether or not the normal operation timer for which the OP time is set in step S1303 = 0 (S1353).

If it is not the electric chew opening time (NO in step S1353), the auxiliary game control process is finished. On the other hand, if it is the electric chew opening time (YES in step S1353), the electric chew opening process is performed (S1354), and the auxiliary game control process is completed. In the electric chew opening process, the opening time according to the opening order is set in the timer for normal operation by referring to the auxiliary game control pattern table and the opening number counter set in step S1303, and the electric chew 23 is opened. The electric chew solenoid 23S is energized to drive the electric chew opening / closing member 23K to open the second starting port 22.

In step S1355, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 23 is satisfied. In the first embodiment, the closing condition is that the number of winnings to the electric chew 23 (second starting port 22) at the opening reaches the specified maximum number of winnings (9 per opening in the first embodiment). Either that, or the time to close the electric chew 23 has been reached (that is, a predetermined opening time has elapsed since the electric chew 23 was opened, in other words, the timer for normal operation = 0) is satisfied. It is that you are. Then, if the closing condition of the electric chew 23 is not satisfied (NO in S1355), the auxiliary game control process is completed, and if the closing condition of the electric chew 23 is satisfied (YES in S1355), the electric chew closing process is performed. Do (S1356). In the electric chew closing process, the electric chew solenoid 23S is energized to drive the electric chew opening / closing member 23K to close the electric chew 23.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the electric chew open remaining number counter by 1 (S1357), and determines whether or not the value of the electric chew open remaining number counter is “0” (S1358). If the value of the electric chew open remaining count counter is not "0" (NO in S1358), the auxiliary game control process is completed (NO in S1358), and if the value of the electric chew open remaining count counter is "0" (S1358) Yes), the hit ending flag is turned on in the predetermined area of RAM 84 (S1359), and the ED time of the auxiliary game is set in the normal operation timer with reference to the auxiliary game control table set in step S1303 (S1360). , The hit ending command indicating that the ending of the auxiliary game is started is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84 (S1361), and the auxiliary game control process is ended.

In step S1362, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ending of the auxiliary game ends, in other words, whether or not the ED time set in step S1360 has elapsed since the ending of the auxiliary game was started. In other words, it is determined in step S1360 whether or not the normal operation timer with the ED time set = 0. If the ending of the auxiliary game does not end (NO in S1362), the auxiliary game control process ends, and if the ending of the auxiliary game ends (YES in S1362), the winning ending flag is turned off (S1363), and the normal operation status is set. Change to "1" (S1364) and end the auxiliary game control process.

[Special operation processing]
Next, the special operation processing related to the control of the special figure display 41, the special figure hold display 43, and the grand prize devices 31 and 33 will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, the processes related to the special figure display 41, the special figure hold display 43, and the grand prize devices 31 and 33 are divided into six statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 81 first confirms the "special operation status" (S1501). The game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (S1502) when the "special operation status" is "1", and changes the special symbol when the "special operation status" is "2". Process (S1503) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "3", the special symbol confirmation process (S1504) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "4", the jackpot game control Process (S1505) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "5", the game state setting process (S1506) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "6", the small hit game Perform control processing (S1507). The "special operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process performed during standby when the variable display of the special symbol, the big hit game, and the small hit game are not performed. The special symbol standby process will be described in detail later.

The special symbol variation process (S1503) is a process performed when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The special symbol variation processing will be described in detail later.

The special symbol confirmation process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol determination process will be described in detail later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. The jackpot game control process will be described in detail later.

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process of setting the game state according to the jackpot symbol or the like when the jackpot game ends. The game state setting process will be described in detail later.

The small hit game control process (S1507) is a process performed in the big hit game. The small hit game control process will be described in detail later.

[Special symbol standby processing]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be described with reference to FIG. 49. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is "0" (S1601). Special figure 2 When the number of pending numbers is "0" (YES in S1601), that is, when there is no memory of the special figure 2 related random numbers acquired due to winning the second starting port 22, special figure 1 It is determined whether or not the number of holdings is "0" (S1608). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is also "0" (YES in S1608), that is, when there is no memory of the random numbers related to special figure 1 acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 20, the customer Determine whether the wait flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S1618), the special symbol waiting process is completed, and if the customer waiting flag is not ON (NO in S1618), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer (S1619). , Turn on the customer waiting flag (S1620) and finish the special symbol waiting process.

When the special figure 2 hold number is not "0" in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, when there is one or more memories of the special figure 2 related random numbers acquired due to winning the second starting port 22. Performs the special figure 2 determination process (S1602) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603).

In the special figure 2 determination process (S1602), the earliest stored special symbol random number stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 852 is read out, and the second jackpot determination table (FIG. 9 (A)) is read. Based on (see), it is determined whether the player is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (big hit judgment). If the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol type random number is read out, and the jackpot symbol type is determined (big hit symbol type determination) based on the second jackpot symbol type determination table (see FIG. 9B). Then, the jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the special symbol buffer provided in the RAM 84, and the symbol designation command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the RAM 84. Further, as the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the game state data at the time of winning the big hit indicating the current game state is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 84. If the result of the big hit determination is a small hit, the small hit symbol type random number is read out, and the small hit symbol type is determined based on the second small hit symbol type determination table (see FIG. 9C) (small hit). Determine the symbol type). Then, the small hit symbol data representing the small hit symbol type is set in the special symbol buffer provided in the RAM 84, and the symbol designation command representing the small hit symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the RAM 84. If the result of the jackpot determination is "miss", the lost symbol data representing the loss is set in the special symbol buffer, and the symbol designation command representing the loss is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the game is currently in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state) (S1651). If it is in the normal game state (YES in S1651), select the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for the normal game state (S1652), then proceed to step S1654, and if it is not in the normal game state (NO in S1651), the time is shortened. After selecting the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the state (S1653), the process proceeds to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot determination result is "big hit". If it is a big hit (YES in S1654), select the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hit from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1661), and then step. Proceed to S1662, and if it is not a big hit (NO in S1654), it is judged whether or not the big hit judgment result is "small hit" (S1655). If it is a small hit (YES in S1655), select the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for small hits from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1660). From step S1662, if it is not a small hit (NO in S1655), a reach judgment is made (S1656). In the reach judgment, the reach random number is read out, and the reach random number is collated with the reach judgment table (see FIG. 9D) according to the current gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state), and there is reach or no reach. Is determined.

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S1656 is “with reach” (S1657). If there is reach (YES in S1657), select the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss with reach from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1659). Then proceed to step S1662, and if there is no reach (NO in S1657), check the current number of special figure 2 holdings, and in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. Select the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach according to the special figure 2 hold number (S1658), and then proceed to step S1662. However, in the first embodiment, since only one type of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach is provided regardless of the number of special figure 2 reserved, in this process, it is associated with the current gaming state. One special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for non-reach loss is selected.

In step S1662, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the special figure fluctuation pattern random number, collates the special figure fluctuation pattern random number with the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1658 to S1661. Special Figure 2 Determining the fluctuation pattern Special Figure 2 Determines the fluctuation pattern. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special figure 2 fluctuation start command indicating the determined special figure 2 fluctuation pattern in the output buffer (S1663), and the special figure variation according to the determined special figure 2 fluctuation pattern. The time is set in the special operation timer (S1664), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process. The special operation timer is updated by 4 ms in the other process (S108) of FIG. 39. In addition, the set special figure 2 fluctuation start command includes information on the type of special symbol (that is, special figure 2), information on the result of the jackpot judgment performed in the special figure 2 judgment process (S1602), and special figures. FIG. 2 Information on the result of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination performed in the fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) (information including the presence / absence of reach and the information on the special figure fluctuation time) is included.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 causes the special figure 2 display 412 to start the variation display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604). ..

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 852 to the side read from the current position, and the special figure 2 hold storage unit 852. The storage area corresponding to the first hold storage area (the storage area farthest from the read side) is cleared in the special figure 2 hold storage unit shift process (S1605). In this way, the special figure 2 hold is digested in the order in which it was held.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 is changed by subtracting "1" from the special figure 2 hold number counter (S1606) and decreasing the special figure 2 hold number indicated by the special figure 2 hold indicator 432 by "1" (S1606). S1607), change the special operation status to "2" (S1615).

After that, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), if it is ON (YES in S1616), turns off the customer waiting flag (S1617), and performs a special symbol standby process. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process is finished without executing step S1617.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold number is "0" but the special figure 1 hold number is not "0" (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no hold information in special figure 2, but the first start If there is one or more memories of the special figure 1 related random numbers (holding information of special figure 1) acquired due to the winning of the mouth 20, the special figure 1 judgment process (S1609) and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment Perform processing (S1610). Since the special figure 1 determination process (S1609) is the same process as the special figure 2 determination process (S1602), the description thereof will be omitted. Further, since the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1610) is basically the same process as the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603), the description thereof will be omitted. However, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process, if the result of the special figure 1 lottery is a loss without reach, the current number of reserved special figures 1 is confirmed and the special figure 1 is selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. From the variation pattern determination table of FIG. 1, a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for loss without reach according to the number of reservations is selected.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 causes the special figure 1 display 411 to start the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 based on the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 851 to the side read from the current position, and the special figure 1 hold storage unit 851. The storage area corresponding to the fourth hold storage area (the storage area farthest from the read side) is cleared in the special figure 1 hold storage unit shift process (S1612). In this way, the special figure 1 hold is digested in the order in which it was held.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 subtracts "1" from the special figure 1 hold number counter (S1613), and reduces and changes the special figure 1 hold number indicated by the special figure 1 hold indicator 431 by "1" (S1614). ), Change the special operation status to "2" (S1615), and proceed to step S1616.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure 1 hold is performed only when the special figure 2 hold is "0" (when YES in S1601). That is, the digestion of the special figure 2 hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the special figure 1 hold. In the first embodiment, the lottery based on the special figure 2 hold is easier to win the jackpot symbol that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the special figure 1 hold (FIG. 9 (B) and FIG. 9B). (See FIG. 9C).

[Special symbol variation processing]
Next, the special symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol variation processing (S1503), the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 elapses. It is determined whether or not (special operation counter = 0) (S1701). When the variation display of the special symbol is not terminated (NO in S1701), when the variation processing of the special symbol is terminated and the variation display of the special symbol is terminated (YES in S1701), the variation display of the special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display 41. Is terminated, and the stop display of the special symbol according to the symbol data (big hit symbol data, small hit symbol data, or lost symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer in step S1602 or step S1609 is displayed (S1702).

Subsequently, the special figure confirmation time determination for determining the special figure confirmation time is performed (S1703), the determined special figure confirmation time is set in the special operation timer (S1704), and the variation display of the special symbol ends. The special symbol fluctuation stop command shown is set in the output buffer (S1705), the special operation status is changed to "3" (S1706), and the special symbol fluctuation processing is terminated. As described above, the special figure confirmation time determination table is associated with the game state (normal game state / time saving state) and the special figure type (special figure 1 / special figure 2), and is special in each special figure confirmation time determination table. The figure confirmation time is stored so as to correspond to the jackpot judgment result.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 52. In the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol confirmation time set in the special operation timer in step S1704 has elapsed (special). It is determined whether or not the operation counter = 0) (S1751). If you do not want to end the stop display of the special symbol (NO in S1751), if you want to end the stop display of the special symbol by ending the special symbol confirmation process (YES in S1751), you are currently in the time saving state (time saving flag is ON). Judge whether or not (S1752).

If it is not in the current time saving state (NO in S1752), proceed to step S1756, and if it is currently in the time saving state (YES in S1752), the remaining number of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the time saving state (time saving remaining number). The value of the time saving remaining number counter is decremented to "1" (S1753), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving remaining number counter is "0" (S1754). If the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time saving remaining number) is not "0" (NO in S1754), the process proceeds to step S1756, and if the time saving remaining number counter value (time saving remaining number) is "0" (in S1754). YES), shift from the time saving state to the non-time saving state (turn off the time saving flag) (S1755). That is, the normal game state (non-time saving state) is set.

Next, a game state command indicating the current game state is set in the output buffer (S1756), and it is determined whether or not the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol (S1757). If it is not a big hit symbol (NO in S1757), it is determined whether or not the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is a small hit symbol (S1761). If it is not a small hit symbol (NO in S1761), the special operation status is changed to "1" (S1764), and the special symbol confirmation process ends.

On the other hand, if it is a jackpot symbol in step S1757 (YES in S1757), the game state is reset (normal game state is set. Specifically, the time reduction flag is turned off and the value of the time reduction remaining number counter is set to "0". To) (S1758). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1759), changes the special operation status to "4" (S1760), and ends the special symbol determination process. In the jackpot game preparation process, a special game control table (TBL No. 11-1 to 11-3) according to the type of jackpot symbol is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 84, and a jackpot opening flag indicating that the jackpot game is being opened. Is turned on in a predetermined area of the RAM 84, and a predetermined opening time (time from the start of the jackpot game to the start of one round) is set in the special operation timer according to the type of the jackpot symbol, and the jackpot symbol is set. The jackpot opening command according to the type is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84. The jackpot opening command according to the type of the jackpot symbol indicates that the jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) according to the type of the jackpot symbol that has been stopped and displayed is started.

If it is a small hit symbol in step S1761 (YES in S1761), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a small hit game preparation process (S1762), changes the special operation status to "6" (S1763), and is special. The symbol confirmation process is terminated. In the small hit game preparation process, a special game control table (TBL No. 11-2 to 11-3) according to the type of the small hit symbol is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 84 to indicate that the small hit game is being opened. The small hit opening flag is turned on in the predetermined area of the RAM 84, and the predetermined opening time (from the start of the small hit game to the start of opening of the first second big winning opening 32) is set according to the type of the small hit symbol. Time) is set in the special operation timer, the number of times the second big winning opening 32 is opened is set in the AT open number counter provided in the RAM 84, and the small hit opening command according to the type of the small hit symbol is issued in the RAM 84. Set in the output buffer, turn on the distribution device control flag indicating that the distribution device 36 is to be controlled in the predetermined area of the RAM 84, and from the start of the small hit game until the specific area 34 is released (V open). (0.008 seconds in the first embodiment) is set in the V open / close control timer provided in the RAM 84. The small hit opening command according to the type of the small hit symbol indicates that the small hit game (opening of the small hit game) according to the type of the small hit symbol that has been stopped and displayed is started.

[Big hit game control process]
As shown in FIG. 53, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the opening flag is ON in the jackpot game control process (S1505) (S1801). If the jackpot opening flag is not ON (NO in S1801), proceed to step S1808, and if the jackpot opening flag is ON (YES in S1801), whether to end the jackpot game opening (big hit opening), in other words. , The special operation timer = 0 for which the opening time is set in step S1759, and it is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed since the opening started (S1802). When the opening is not finished (NO in S1802), the jackpot game control process is finished and the opening is finished (YES in S1802), the jackpot opening flag is turned off (S1803), and the counter value of the round count counter is being executed. It is determined whether or not the number of executions of the round game in the jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as "the number of execution rounds") is (S1804). As will be described later, the round count counter is incremented by "1" at the start of each round game. If the counter value of the round count counter is the number of executed rounds, in other words, when all the round games in the running jackpot game are executed (YES in S1804), the process proceeds to step S1813, and the counter value of the round count counter is set. If it is not the number of execution rounds (NO in S1804), the process proceeds to step S1805.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 increments the round count counter by "1" (S1805), and based on the special game control table set in step S1759 and the number of rounds of the round game to be started from now on, the first big winning opening. The big winning opening opening process for opening 30 is performed (S1806), the round number specification command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84 (S1807), and the big hit game control process is terminated. .. In the game control opening processing, the game control microcomputer 81 energizes the first large winning opening solenoid 31S to drive the normal AT opening / closing member 31K to open the first large winning opening 30, and the first large winning opening 30 is opened in a predetermined area of the RAM 84. Turn on the large winning opening opening flag indicating that the 1 large winning opening 30 is open, refer to the special game control table, and set the opening time of the 1st large winning opening 30 in the round game to be started from now on as a timer for special operation. Set to.

In step S1808, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending flag indicating that the jackpot game, which will be described later, is ending is ON. If the jackpot ending flag is ON (YES in S1808), the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the process to step S1816, and if the jackpot ending flag is not ON (NO in S1808), the jackpot ending flag (NO in S1808) is currently the jackpot (first jackpot). It is determined whether or not the mouth 30) is open (S1809). Whether or not the large winning opening (first large winning opening 30) is open is determined by whether or not the large winning opening opening flag is ON. The game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S1812 unless the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 30) is open (NO in S1809), and the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 30) is open. If (YES in S1809), it is determined whether or not the conditions for ending the opening of the large winning opening are satisfied (S1810). The condition for ending the opening of the large winning opening is that the number of winning large winning openings (1st large winning opening 30 and 2nd large winning opening 32) in the round game has been reached, or that the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 32) has been reached in the round game. A predetermined opening time has elapsed since the opening of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 32) (in step S1806, the special operation timer in which the opening time of the first large winning opening 30 is set is set to " It means that one of the items (which became 0) is satisfied.

The game control microcomputer 81 ends the jackpot game control process if the big winning opening opening end condition is not satisfied (NO in S1810), and is large if the big winning opening opening ending condition is satisfied (YES in S1810). The winning opening is closed (S1811). In the large winning opening closing process, the game control microcomputer 81 energizes the first large winning opening solenoid 31S to drive the normal AT opening / closing member 31K to close the first large winning opening 30, and sets the large winning opening opening flag. It is turned off, and the closing time of the first large winning opening 30 in the round game being executed is set in the special operation timer with reference to the special game control table.

In step S1812, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the interval end condition has ended. The interval end condition is that a predetermined closing time has elapsed since the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 30 and 2nd large winning opening 32) was closed in the round game (1st large winning opening 30 in step S1811). The special operation timer for which the closing time of is set has become "0"). If the interval end condition is not satisfied (NO in S1812), the game control microcomputer 81 ends the jackpot game control process, and if the interval end condition is satisfied (YES in S1812), the process proceeds to step S1804.

When the game control microcomputer 81 determines in step S1804 that the counter value of the round count counter is the number of execution rounds (YES in S1804), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a jackpot ending flag indicating that the jackpot game is ending in a predetermined area of the RAM 84. Turn it on (S1813), set a predetermined ending time (time from the end of all round games to the end of the jackpot game) in the special operation timer (S1814) according to the type of jackpot symbol, and set the jackpot. The jackpot ending command according to the type of the symbol is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84 (S1815), and the jackpot game control process is completed. The jackpot ending command according to the type of jackpot symbol indicates that the ending of the jackpot game according to the type of the jackpot symbol that has been stopped and displayed is started.

In step S1816, the game control microcomputer 81 decides whether or not to end the ending of the jackpot game (big hit ending), in other words, the special operation timer = 0 in which the ending time is set in step S1814, and the ending starts. It is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed since then. If you do not want to end the jackpot ending (NO in S1816), if you want to end the jackpot game control process and end the jackpot ending (YES in S1816), turn off the jackpot ending flag (S1817) and set the special operation status to "5". Change (S1818) and end the jackpot game control process.

[Game status setting process]
Next, the game state setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 54. In the game state setting process (S1506), the game control microcomputer 81 first sets the time saving state, that is, turns on the time saving flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 84 (S1851), and outputs a game state command indicating the set time saving state as an output buffer. Set to (S1852).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 confirms the jackpot symbol or the small hit symbol caused by the jackpot game related to the game state setting process (S1853), confirms the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (S1854), and confirms them. The time reduction specified number of times is judged by collating with the time saving specified number of times judgment table (S1855), the time saving specified number of times is set in the time saving remaining number counter (S1856), and the special operation status is changed to 1 (S1856). S1857), the game state setting process is terminated. For the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the game state data at the time of winning the big hit set in step S230, step S1602 or step S1609 is referred to.

[Small hit game control process]
As shown in FIG. 55, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the small hit opening flag is ON in the small hit game control process (S1507) (S1901). If the small hit opening flag is not ON (NO in S1901), the process proceeds to step S1907, and if the small hit opening flag is ON (YES in S1901), whether to end the small hit game opening (small hit opening). Or, in other words, the special operation timer for which the opening time is set in step S1762 = 0, and it is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed since the opening started (S1902). When the small hit opening is not finished (NO in S1902), when the small hit game control process is finished and the small hit opening is finished (YES in S1902), the small hit opening flag is turned off (S1903), and the AT open count counter It is determined whether or not the counter value of is the number of times the second big winning opening 32 is opened in the small hit game being executed (hereinafter, referred to as "execution AT opening number") (S1904). As will be described later, the AT opening count counter is incremented by "1" at the start of each opening. If the counter value of the AT opening count counter is the executed AT opening number, in other words, when the opening of all the second big winning openings 32 in the small hit game being executed is completed (YES in S1904), the process proceeds to step S1912. If the counter value of the AT open count counter is not the execution AT open count (NO in S1904), the process proceeds to step S1905.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 increments the AT opening count counter by "1" (S1905), and is based on the special game control table set in step S1762 and the opening order of the second large winning opening 32 to be started. , The large winning opening opening process for opening the second large winning opening 32 is performed (S1906), and the small hit game control process is completed. In the game control opening processing, the game control microcomputer 81 energizes the second large winning opening solenoid 33S to drive the VAT opening / closing member 33K to open the second large winning opening 32, and the second large winning opening 32 is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 84. Turn on the large winning opening opening flag indicating that the large winning opening 32 is open, refer to the special game control table, and set the opening time of the opening of the second special winning opening 32 to be started from now on in the special operation timer. To do.

In step S1907, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit ending flag indicating that the small hit game, which will be described later, is being ended is ON. If the small hit ending flag is ON (YES in S1907), the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the process to step S1920, and if the small hit ending flag is not ON (NO in S1907), the large winning opening (second) is currently available. It is determined whether or not the large winning opening 32) is open (S1908). Whether or not the large winning opening (second large winning opening 32) is open is determined by whether or not the large winning opening opening flag is ON. The game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S1911 unless the large winning opening (second large winning opening 32) is open (NO in S1908), and the large winning opening (second large winning opening 32) is open. If (YES in S1908), it is determined whether or not the conditions for ending the opening of the large winning opening are satisfied (S1909). The condition for ending the opening of the large winning opening is that the number of winnings specified for the large winning opening (second large winning opening 32) in the small hit game (“9” in the first embodiment) has been reached, or the large winning opening A predetermined opening time has elapsed since the opening of (2nd prize opening 32) (the special operation timer for which the opening time of the 2nd winning opening 32 is set in step S1906 has become "0". ) Is satisfied.

The game control microcomputer 81 ends the small hit game control process if the large winning opening opening end condition is not satisfied (NO in S1909), and if the large winning opening opening ending condition is satisfied (YES in S1909). Close the winning opening (S1910). In the game control opening closing process, the game control microcomputer 81 energizes the second large winning opening solenoid 33S to drive the VAT opening / closing member 33K to close the second large winning opening 32 and turns off the large winning opening opening flag. Then, the closing time of the second special winning opening 32 is set in the special operation timer with reference to the special game control table.

In step S1910, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the interval end condition has ended. The interval end condition is that a predetermined closing time has elapsed since the large winning opening (second large winning opening 32) was closed (a timer for special operation in which the closing time of the second large winning opening 32 is set in step S1910). Became "0"). If the interval end condition is not satisfied (NO in S1911), the game control microcomputer 81 ends the small hit game control process, and if the interval end condition is satisfied (YES in S1911), the process proceeds to step S1904.

When the game control microcomputer 81 determines in step S1904 that the counter value of the AT open count counter is the number of executed AT open (YES in S1904), whether or not the V flag is ON, that is, during the small hit game. It is determined whether or not V has passed (S1912).

When the V flag is ON (YES in S1912), the big hit game is performed after the small hit game, so the V flag is turned OFF (S1913) and the game state is reset (the normal game state is set. Specifically, the normal game state is set. , Turn off the time saving flag, set the value of the time saving remaining number counter to "0") (S1914), perform the big hit game preparation process (S1915), change the special operation status to "4" (S1916), and make a small hit The game control process is terminated. In the jackpot game preparation process, a special game control table (TBL No. 10-2 to 10-3) according to the type of the small hit symbol is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 84, and the jackpot opening indicating that the jackpot game is being opened. The flag is turned on in the predetermined area of the RAM 84, the predetermined opening time (the time from the start of the big hit game to the start of the second round) is set in the special operation timer according to the type of the small hit symbol, and the big hit The jackpot opening command according to the type of the symbol is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84. The jackpot opening command according to the type of the jackpot symbol indicates that the jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) according to the type of the small hit symbol that has been stopped and displayed is started.

If the V flag is not ON (NO in S1912), the big hit game is not performed. Therefore, the small hit ending flag indicating that the small hit game is ending is turned ON in the predetermined area of the RAM 84 (S1917), and the small hit symbol is displayed. A predetermined ending time (time from the end of opening of all the second big winning openings 32 to the end of the small hit game) is set in the special operation timer (S1918) according to the type of A small hit ending command according to the symbol type is set in the output buffer of the RAM 84 (S1919). The small hit ending command according to the type of the small hit symbol indicates that the ending of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit symbol that has been stopped and displayed is started.

In step S1920, the game control microcomputer 81 decides whether or not to end the ending of the small hit game (small hit ending), in other words, the special operation timer = 0 in which the ending time is set in step S1918, and the small hit It is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed since the ending started. When not ending the small hit ending (NO in S1920), when ending the small hit game control process and ending the small hit ending (YES in S1920), turn off the small hit ending flag (S1921) and set the special operation status. Change to "1" (S1922) and end the small hit game control process.

[Distributor control process]
As shown in FIG. 56, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the distribution device control flag is ON in the distribution device control process (S107) (S2001). As described above, the distribution device control flag is turned on by the small hit game preparation process in step S1762. If the distribution device control flag is not ON (NO in S2001), the game control microcomputer 81 finishes the distribution device control process, and if the distribution device control flag is ON (YES in S2001), the distribution member 36K It is determined whether or not the V-opening flag indicating that the passage is permitted and V is open is ON (S2002). If the V-opening flag is ON (YES in S2002), the process proceeds to step S2007, and if the V-opening flag is not ON (NO in S2002), the specific area 34 is opened (V) after the small hit game is started. Whether or not it is the time to open) (V opening start time), specifically, whether the time set in the V open / close control timer (V opening start time) in the small hit game preparation process in step S1762 has become 0. Judge whether or not (S2003). The game control microcomputer 81 finishes the distribution device control process if it is not the V opening start time (NO in S2003), and performs the distribution member operation process (S2004) if it is the V opening start time (YES in S2003). The V validity period setting process is performed (S2005), the V open flag is turned ON in the predetermined area of the RAM 84 (S2006), and the sorting device control process is completed.

In the distribution member operation process, the distribution solenoid 36S is energized to drive the distribution member 36K to open the specific area 34, and the time to open the specific area 34 (4 in the first embodiment). .6 seconds) is set in the V open / close control timer. The time for opening the specific area 34 set in the V open / close control timer is the V open end time described later.

Further, in the V validity period setting process, the V validity period is set for the constant operation of the distribution member 36K as described above. The V valid period is a period during which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 34a is valid, and the V flag is turned on during the V valid period. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 84.

Further, in step S2007, whether or not the game control microcomputer 81 has the V opening end time, specifically, whether or not the V opening / closing control timer for which the V opening end time is set in step S2004 has become 0. To judge. The game control microcomputer 81 finishes the distribution device control process if it is not the V opening end time (NO in S2007), and turns off the V opening flag (S2008) if it is the V opening end time (YES in S2007). The V validity period cancellation process for canceling (ending) the set V validity period is performed (S2009), the distribution device control flag is turned off (S2010), and the distribution device control process is completed. The game control microcomputer 81 turns off the V flag in the V validity period release process.

In the first embodiment, the V valid period is released with the end of the open state of the specific area 34, but a time longer than the V opening end time from the time when the open state of the specific area 34 starts It may be canceled when it has passed. This is to reduce the disadvantage suffered by the player in consideration of the time lag until the game ball that has passed the arrangement position of the distribution member 36K reaches the specific area 34.

6. Production control by the production control microcomputer 91 [Sub-control main processing]
Next, the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 57 to 71. The counter, timer, flag, buffer, etc. that appear in the following description of the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM 94. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub control board 90 reads out the sub control main processing program shown in FIG. 57 from the ROM 93 and executes it.

As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, the process at power-on according to the power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on processing, for example, the CPU 92 is set, and SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time) and the like are set.

Next, the interrupt is disabled (S4002) and the random number seed update process is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of the random number counters for various effect determinations for determining the various effects are updated. The random numbers for the effect determination include a random number for determining the pending change notice, a random number for determining the execution of the precursor effect, a random number for determining the type of the pending change advance notice, a random number for determining the execution of the predictive effect, and a random number for determining the precursor effect type. , First challenge effect pattern determination random number, stop symbol determination random number, special figure variation effect pattern determination random number, and various other random numbers for determining the effect content. As an example, the method for updating the random number counter for determination for various effects can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Instead of adding the random numbers one by one at the time of updating, it may be added by two. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above.

When the random number seed update process is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 (for example, a winning hold change notice start command, a shift hold change notice start command, and a changing hold change notice start command, which will be described later). Command, special figure fluctuation production start command, precursor effect production start command, retention predictive effect start command, precursor effect regulation start command, precursor effect regulation end command, reduced screen display end command, challenge to V second half start command , Fuzu variable production start command, auxiliary game connecting effect start command, special figure 1 changing connecting effect start command, electric chew non-winning effect start command, customer waiting start command, opening effect start command, round effect start command, and , Ending effect start command, etc.) is transmitted to the image control board 100. The image control board 100 that has received the command displays an image on the display unit 7a according to the received command (executes various effects by the image). Further, the sub-control board 90 outputs sound from the speaker 67 via the voice control circuit 106 (executes various effects by voice) and a lamp control circuit, in addition to various effects performed by the image control board 100. The frame lamp 66 is made to emit light through the 107 (various effects are executed by the light emission), and the board movable body 15K is operated (various effects are executed by the operation). The various effects include a special figure variation effect, a jackpot game effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect), a normal figure variation effect, an auxiliary game effect, an operation promotion effect, and a customer waiting effect.

The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently enables interrupts (S4005). After that, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4010), the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) can be executed.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time an STB signal (strobe signal), that is, various commands sent from the main control board 80 are input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91. In the reception interrupt processing (S4010), the effect control microcomputer 91 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output processing (S101) of the main control board 80 in the reception buffer of the RAM 94. This receive interrupt processing is executed in preference to other interrupt processing (S4011, S4012).

Further, the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a 1 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. In the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011), the effect control microcomputer 91 performs an input process for creating effect button switch data based on a detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 is created in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) by other processes (S4206) in the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later in order to make the frame lamp 66 emit light at a timing that matches the effect by the image. A lamp control process for outputting the generated lamp data to the lamp control circuit 107 is performed. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the frame lamp 66 to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode according to the lamp data. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a drive control process for creating or outputting drive data in order to drive the panel movable body 15K at a predetermined timing in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011). The drive data set in each process in the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later is also output in this process. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 drives the panel movable body 15K in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 58. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the sub control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a receive command analysis process for analyzing a command or the like stored in the receive buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis process will be described later.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a timer for measuring the time related to each effect such as the special figure variation effect, the normal figure variation effect, the jackpot game effect, the auxiliary game effect, the operation promotion effect, and the customer waiting effect. The effect timer to be updated is updated (S4202). Further, the customer waiting effect execution process (S4203) for starting the customer waiting effect is performed.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch state acquisition process of storing the effect button switch data created by the 1 ms timer interrupt process in the RAM 94 as the effect button switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4204). The effect control microcomputer 91 can recognize whether or not the effect button 63 is operated by the switch state acquisition process.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a precursor effect regulation release determination process for returning the precursor effect A of regulation to the normal precursor effect A (S4205). The process of determining the release of the precursory effect regulation will be described later.

After that, as other processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 is set in the output buffer and transmitted to the image control board 100, a special figure variation effect start command, a precursor effect effect start command, and a change predictor effect. Gase start command, normal figure variation effect start command, auxiliary game in-game connection effect start command, special figure 1 change in change in connection effect start command, customer waiting start command, opening effect start command, round effect start command, and ending effect start command Create lamp data (data that controls the lighting of the frame lamp 66), create audio data (data that controls the output of audio from the speaker 67), and go to the audio control circuit 106 based on the effect content shown by. (S4206).

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. In the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first receives a start winning command (first start winning command or second starting winning command) from the main control board 80, in other words, receiving the starting winning command. Determine if it was stored in the buffer (S4301). If the start winning command has been received (YES in S4301), the process proceeds to step S4302, while if the start winning command has not been received (NO in S4301), the process proceeds to step S4303.

In step S4302, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a start winning process according to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 22. The processing at the time of starting prize will be described later.

In step S4303, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the symbol designation command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether or not the symbol designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 91 has not received the symbol designation command (NO in S4303), the process proceeds to step S4305, while if it has received the symbol designation command (YES in S4303), the symbol designation command is in the RAM 94. It is stored in the symbol designation command storage unit 96 (S4304). It should be noted that the information (special figure analysis result) acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 can be appropriately used in the subsequent processing.

In step S4305, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the special figure variation start command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether or not the special figure variation start command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure change start command has not been received (NO in S4305), the process proceeds to step S4309, while if the special figure change start command has been received (YES in S4305), the production content of the special figure change effect is determined. , To update the special figure variation effect start process (S4306) for starting the special figure variation effect, the hold icon shift process (S4307) for shifting the hold icon, and the time reduction remaining number display indicating the time reduction remaining number. Performs the production mode remaining count display control process (S4308). The special figure variation effect start process and the hold icon shift process will be described later.

In step S4309, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 91 has not received the special figure fluctuation stop command (NO in S4309), the process proceeds to step S4314, while the special figure fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4309), the special figure change. Special figure variation effect end processing (S4310) for ending the effect (stops the variation display of the effect symbol and small symbol and performs stop display), variation icon deletion process (S4311) for erasing the variation icon, precursor The precursor effect regulation process (S4312) for determining whether or not to hide the effect and the reduced screen display end determination process (S4313) for determining whether or not to end the display of the reduced screen are performed.

In the special figure variation effect end process, the special figure variation stop command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the special figure variation effect is appropriately terminated (the variation display of the effect symbol or the small symbol is stopped). The effect end command is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94. When the image control board 100 receives the command to end the special figure variation effect, the image control board 100 ends the special figure variation effect being executed (stops the effect symbol and the small symbol being changed). Further, in the special figure variation effect end process, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation effect being executed is the success of the second half of the challenge effect to V, and if the latter half of the challenge effect to V is successful, the VAT launch promotion effect is performed. And a command for executing the small hit game rush effect is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94. As shown in FIG. 11, when a small hit is made in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal game state, that is, when the second half of the challenge production to V is successful, the special figure confirmation time of the special figure 2 stop display to be performed after that is performed. Is set to 13 seconds, which is longer than in other cases. Therefore, when the image control board 100 receives the command, the VAT launch promotion effect is first executed, and then the small hit game rush effect is executed during the special figure 2 stop display.

Further, in the variable icon erasing process, a variable icon display end command indicating to erase the variable icon is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94. When the image control board 100 receives the command to end the display of the variable icon, the image control board 100 erases the variable icon being displayed. The precursor effect regulation process (S4312) and the reduced screen display end determination process (S4313) will be described later.

In step S4314, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the jackpot opening command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether or not the jackpot opening command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 91 has not received the jackpot opening command (NO in S4314), the process proceeds to step S4316, while if it has received the jackpot opening command (YES in S4314), the opening of the jackpot game is started. The accompanying jackpot opening production start processing is performed (S4315). In the jackpot opening effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the jackpot opening command, and based on the analysis result, determines whether or not to execute the jackpot opening effect according to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed from now on. If it is determined and executed, the effect content of the jackpot opening effect (big hit opening effect pattern) is selected, and the jackpot opening effect start command for starting the jackpot opening effect with the selected jackpot opening effect pattern is sent to the output buffer of the RAM 94. Set to.

In step S4316, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the round number designation command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether or not the round number designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the number of rounds specification command has not been received (NO in S4316), the process proceeds to step S4318, while if the number of rounds specification command has been received (YES in S4316), the round effect start process accompanying the start of the round game is performed. (S4317). In the round effect start processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the round number designation command, determines whether or not to execute the round effect according to the round game to be started, and if so, the round effect. The effect content (round effect pattern) of is selected, and the round effect start command corresponding to the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

In step S4318, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the jackpot ending command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether or not the jackpot ending command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the jackpot ending command has not been received (NO in S4318), the process proceeds to step S4321, while if the jackpot ending command has been received (YES in S4318), the jackpot ending effect start process associated with the start of the ending of the jackpot game (NO). Performs S4319) and effect mode setting processing (S4320).

The effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the jackpot ending command in the jackpot ending effect start process, determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending effect according to the ending of the jackpot game to be executed, and executes it. For example, the effect content of the jackpot ending effect (big hit ending effect pattern) is selected, and the jackpot ending effect start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process for setting the effect mode after the jackpot game (process for controlling the effect mode) based on the analysis result of the jackpot ending command in the effect mode setting process. ..

In step S4321, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the small hit opening command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether or not the small hit opening command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 91 has not received the small hit opening command (NO in S4321), the process proceeds to step S4323, while if it has received the small hit opening command (YES in S4321), the opening of the small hit game. The small hit opening effect start processing is performed with the start of (S4322). The effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the small hit opening command in the small hit opening effect start process for the small hit game executed by the special figure 2 lottery in the normal game state, and executes it from now on based on the analysis result. It is determined whether or not to execute the small hit opening effect according to the opening of the small hit game to be performed, and if it is executed, the effect content (small hit opening effect pattern) of the small hit opening effect is selected, and the selected small The small hit opening effect start command for starting the small hit opening effect in the hit opening effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

In step S4323, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the V-passing command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether or not the V-passing command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the V-pass command has not been received (NO in S4323), the process proceeds to step S4325, while if the V-pass command has been received (YES in S4323), the V-pass effect start process associated with V-pass is performed (S4324). .. In the V-passing effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the V-passing is the first V-passing in the small hit game being executed, and if it is the first V-passing, the V-passing is performed. The V-passing effect start command for notifying is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94. If it is not the first V-pass, the V-pass effect start process is finished as it is without setting the V-pass effect start command in the output buffer of the RAM 94. That is, the V-passing effect is performed only in response to the first V-passing in the small hit game.

In step S4325, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the small hit ending command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether or not the small hit ending command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 91 has not received the small hit ending command (NO in S4325), the process proceeds to step S4327, while if it has received the small hit ending command (YES in S4325), the ending of the small hit game. The small hit ending effect start processing is performed with the start of (S4326). The effect control microcomputer 91 analyzes the small hit ending command in the small hit ending effect start process for the small hit game executed by the special figure 2 lottery in the normal game state, and executes it from now on based on the analysis result. It is determined whether or not to execute the small hit ending effect according to the ending of the small hit game to be performed, and if it is executed, the effect content of the small hit ending effect (small hit ending effect pattern) is selected, and the selected small hit is selected. The small hit ending effect start command for starting the small hit ending effect in the hit ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

In step S4327, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the game state command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether or not the game state command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 91 has not received the game state command (NO in S4327), it proceeds to step S4329, while if it has received the game state command (YES in S4327), it analyzes the game state command. , The game state represented by the game state command is specified, and the game state setting process for setting the game state is performed (S4328). In the game state setting process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the game state flag corresponding to the game state indicated by the game state command in the game state flag area of the RAM 94. For example, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the game state flag “00H” in the game state flag area of the RAM 94 if the game state indicated by the game state command is the normal game state. The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the game state flag “01H” in the game state flag area of the RAM 94 if the game state indicated by the game state command is a time saving state.

In step S4329, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the normal figure fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether or not the normal figure change start command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the normal map fluctuation start command has not been received (NO in S4329), the process proceeds to step S4331. , Performs the normal map fluctuation effect determination process (S4330) for starting the normal map variation effect. The normal map fluctuation effect determination process will be described later.

In step S4331, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the hit opening command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether or not the hit opening command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 91 has not received the hit opening command (NO in S4331), it proceeds to step S4333, while if it has received the hit opening command (YES in S4331), it assists with the start of the auxiliary game. Process at the start of the game (S4332). The processing at the start of the auxiliary game will be described later.

In step S4333, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the hit ending command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether or not the hit ending command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 91 has not received the hit ending command (NO in S4333), the process proceeds to step S4335, while if the hit ending command has been received (YES in S4333), the auxiliary game is assisted. Performs processing at the end of the game (S4334). The processing at the end of the auxiliary game will be described later.

In step S4335, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the customer waiting command has been received from the main control board 80, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 91 has not received the customer wait command (NO in S4335), it finishes the reception command analysis process, while if it has received the customer wait command (YES in S4335), the effect wait effect standby process. (S4336). In the customer waiting effect waiting process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a waiting time (customer waiting effect waiting time:, for example, 20 seconds) from the stop display of the effect symbol or the small symbol to the start of the customer waiting effect. Set in the customer waiting effect timer. Whether or not this waiting time has elapsed is monitored by the customer waiting effect execution process in step S4203. When it is determined in the customer waiting effect execution process of step S4203 that the waiting time has elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a customer waiting effect start command for starting the customer waiting effect in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

[Processing at the time of starting prize]
Next, the process at the time of starting winning will be described with reference to FIG. 62. In the start winning process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first stores the received start winning command in the start winning command holding storage unit 95 in the RAM 94 (S4401). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 stores the first start winning command in the first start winning command hold storage unit 951 in the start winning command hold storage unit 95 if it is the first start winning command. On the other hand, if it is a second start winning command, the effect control microcomputer 91 stores it in the second start winning command hold storage unit 952 in the start winning command hold storage unit 95. The first start winning command hold storage unit 951 and the second start winning command hold storage unit 952 are configured in the same manner as the special figure 1 hold storage unit 851 and the special figure 2 hold storage unit 852 of the RAM 84.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the stored start winning command is the first starting winning command (S4402). If it is not the first start winning command (NO in S4402), the process proceeds to step S4413, and if it is the first start winning command (YES in S4402), the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the special figure 1 hold number provided in the RAM 94. Special figure 1 The hold number counter is incremented by "1" (S4403), and it is determined whether or not the mode is currently in the normal effect mode (S4404). Here, if it is not the normal production mode (NO in S4404), the processing at the time of starting prize is completed, and if it is in the normal production mode (YES in S4404), the normal mode corresponding to the special figure 1 hold related to the first start winning command The special figure 1 hold icon display start command for displaying the special figure 1 hold icon is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4405). When the set special figure 1 hold icon display start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads a predetermined effect image from the control ROM 103. The special figure 1 hold icon in the normal mode is displayed on the display unit 7a. The special figure 1 hold icon is a predetermined position of the hold display area 73a according to the number of special figure 1 hold including the special figure 1 hold related to the stored first start winning command (first area 73a to fourth area 73a4). Either) is displayed.

Subsequently, based on the information (win / fail information and special figure fluctuation pattern information) indicated by the first start winning command stored in step S4401, the pending change that determines whether or not to execute the pending change notice and the execution time when it is executed are held. Select the pending change notice judgment table for making the notice judgment (S4406). In the following, the hit / fail information and the special figure fluctuation pattern information indicated by the first start winning command will be referred to as "preliminary judgment result information". As shown in FIGS. 72 to 77, the hold change notice judgment table is associated with the pre-judgment result information (win / fail information and special figure fluctuation pattern information) indicated by the first start winning command and the current special figure 1 hold number. There are multiple. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 91 has one pre-judgment result information (hit / fail information and special figure fluctuation pattern information) indicated by the first start winning command and a hold change notice judgment table associated with the current special figure 1 hold number. select.

In each hold change notice determination table, the value of the random number for hold change notice determination (hold change notice) is set in the hold change notice execution pattern so as to have a predetermined distribution rate (%) (shown in FIGS. 72 to 77). Execution pattern judgment value) is distributed. The hold change notice execution pattern includes the hold change notice execution pattern 01 to the hold change notice execution pattern 04 indicating that the hold change notice is executed, and the hold change notice execution pattern 05 indicating that the hold change notice is not executed. .. The hold change notice execution pattern 01 to the hold change notice execution pattern 04 correspond to the execution time of the hold change notice (at the time of winning) and “next” in the column described as “change timing of the hold icon” in FIGS. 72 to 77, respectively. It is distinguished by "variation after", "variation after two" and "variation after three"). Specifically, the hold change notice execution pattern 01 is set when the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the first start winning command stored in step S4401 occurs, that is, immediately after the special figure 1 hold icon is displayed. Represents to execute. Further, the hold change advance notice execution pattern 02 indicates that the look-ahead effect is executed during the special figure change display (denoted as “next change” in FIGS. 72 to 77) to be started next. The hold change notice execution pattern 03 indicates that the hold change notice is executed during the special figure change display (denoted as "change after two" in FIGS. 72 to 77) which is started one after another. The hold change notice execution pattern 04 indicates that the hold change notice is executed during the special figure change display (denoted as “three later changes” in FIGS. 72 to 77) that are started one after another.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value indicated by the random number counter for determining the pending change notice as the random number for determining the pending change advance notice (S4407), and determines the pending change advance notice based on the acquired random number for determining the pending change advance notice. Do (S4408).

In the hold change notice determination, the effect control microcomputer 91 collates the hold change notice determination random number acquired in step S4407 with the table selected in step S4406, and determines the hold change notice execution pattern.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the result of the hold change notice determination in step S4409 is the execution of the hold change notice (S4409). If it is not the execution of the hold change notice (NO in S4409), the processing at the time of starting winning is finished, and if the hold change notice is executed (YES in S4409), the hold change notice data representing the hold change notice execution pattern is stepped. In association with the first start winning command stored in S4401, it is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 94 (S4410), and whether or not the execution time of the hold change notice represented by the set hold change notice data is the time of winning, that is, hold. It is determined whether or not the pending change notice data representing the change notice execution pattern 01 is set (S4411). If the execution time of the hold change notice is not at the time of winning (NO in S4411), the processing at the start winning is ended, and if the execution time of the hold change notice is at the time of winning (YES in S4411), the display mode of the hold icon is special. Set the hold change notice start command at the time of winning, which indicates that the mode is changed, that is, the hold change notice is to be performed using the hold icon to be displayed in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4412), and start the process at the time of winning. To finish. When the winning hold change notice start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 in step S4413, the special figure 1 hold icon display start command and the winning hold change notice start command are set in the output buffer at that time. However, immediately after the special figure 1 hold icon display start command is output to the image control board 100 first and the special figure 1 hold icon in the normal mode is displayed, the special figure 1 hold icon changes to the special mode. To do.

Further, if the start winning command stored in step S4401 is not the first start winning command (NO in S4402), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is currently in the normal effect mode (S4413). Here, if it is not in the normal production mode (NO in S4413), the processing at the start winning prize is completed, and if it is in the normal production mode (YES in S4413), it means that the long opening auxiliary game in the normal game state is in progress. It is determined whether or not the flag is ON (S4414). If the auxiliary game flag is not ON (NO in S4414), the start winning process is completed, and if the auxiliary game flag is ON (YES in S4414), it indicates that the auxiliary game is being connected. It is determined whether or not the connection effect flag is ON during the game (S4415). If the connection effect flag during the auxiliary game is ON (YES in S4415), the processing at the time of starting winning is completed, and if the connection effect flag during the auxiliary game is not ON (NO in S4415), the special figure 1 variable display is currently being performed. Whether or not it is determined (S4416). If the special figure 1 variable display is not in progress (NO in S4416), the start winning process is completed, and if the special figure 1 variable display is in progress (YES in S4416), the auxiliary game is in the middle of the auxiliary game. The connection effect start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4417), the connection effect flag during the auxiliary game is turned on in the predetermined area of the RAM 94 (S4418), and the start winning process is completed.

When the set auxiliary game connecting effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 receives an image related to the auxiliary game connecting effect from the control ROM 103. Is read out, and the display unit 7a of the image display device 7 starts the connection effect during the auxiliary game.

[Special figure fluctuation production start processing]
Next, the special figure variation effect start processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 64. In the special figure variation effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first stores the received special figure variation start command in the special figure variation pattern storage unit 97 in the RAM 94 (S4501).

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 is a combination of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 (hereinafter referred to as "stop effect symbols") and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 (hereinafter, referred to as "stop effect symbols") to be finally stopped and displayed. Performs a stop symbol determination process to determine (referred to as "stop small symbol") (S4502). In the first embodiment, when the stop display of the special symbol is performed, the stop display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3 is always performed, but the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 may not be performed. is there. In the stop symbol determination process, first, the contents of the stop special symbol (big hit symbol type, small hit symbol type, lost special symbol) indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 and the special symbol indicated by the special symbol fluctuation start command Based on the variation pattern, the stop symbol pattern determination table for determining the stop effect symbol and the stop small symbol is selected. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with the special figure and the special figure fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the type of stop symbol and the special symbol variation pattern. In each stop symbol pattern determination table, a random number value for stop symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination value) is distributed to a plurality of stop effect symbols and stop small symbols so as to have a predetermined distribution rate (%). ing. Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as the stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs the stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number. In the stop symbol pattern determination, the effect control microcomputer 91 collates the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number with the selected stop symbol pattern table, determines the stop symbol (stop effect symbol and stop small symbol), and determines the stop symbol. Data representing the stopped symbol (stop effect symbol and stop small symbol) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a special figure variation effect pattern determination process for determining the effect content (variation effect pattern) of the special figure variation effect (S4503). In the special figure variation effect pattern determination process, a random number for determining the special figure variation effect pattern is acquired, and a plurality of special figure variation effect pattern determination tables provided in association with the effect mode and the special figure variation pattern are selected. By selecting one table based on the current effect mode and the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command, and using the selected table, the acquired random number for determining the special figure variation effect pattern is determined. Determine the special figure variation effect pattern. Once the special figure variation effect pattern is determined, the time of the variation effect, the variation display mode of the effect symbol, the presence or absence of the reach effect, the content of the reach effect, the presence or absence of the operation promotion effect, the content of the operation promotion effect, the effect development configuration, etc. The content of the variable production, which consists of types, etc., will be decided.

As an example of the special figure variation effect pattern, FIG. 78 shows a special figure variation effect pattern determination table for the special figure 2 variation pattern in the normal effect mode. Here, the effect content of the special figure variation effect of FIG. 78 is associated with the effect content of the last challenge effect, that is, the content of the attack of the main character. Then, "→" is described in the production contents of the V challenge second half resurrection jackpot fluctuation, the V challenge second half resurrection small hit fluctuation, and the V challenge second half resurrection loss fluctuation, and two attack contents sandwiching the "→" Is described. This is because in the special figure fluctuation production according to these special figure fluctuation patterns, the resurrection challenge production is performed and the last challenge production is performed twice, so the attack content on the left side of "→" is the first last. The attack content in the challenge production is represented, and the attack content on the right side of "→" represents the attack content in the second last challenge production.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a special figure variation effect start command indicating the effect content of the special figure variation effect, which is composed of the determined stop symbol and the special figure variation effect pattern, in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4504). In addition to the special figure variation effect by the image performed by the image display device 7, the special figure variation effect by the sound output from the speaker 67 and the special figure variation effect by the light emission performed by the frame lamp 66 are used for the special figure variation effect start command. The effect content of the effect and the effect content of the special figure variation effect by the operation performed by the movable board 15K are included. When the special figure variation effect start command set in step S4504 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads a predetermined effect image from the control ROM 103. , The display unit 7a of the image display device 7 performs a special figure variation effect by an image. Further, in the effect control microcomputer 91, the special figure variation effect content indicated by the special figure variation effect start command transmitted to the image control board 100 while the special figure variation effect by the image performed by the image control board 100 is being performed. In response to the above, the speaker 67 outputs the sound via the voice control circuit 106 (executes the special figure variation effect by the voice), and the frame lamp 66 emits light via the lamp control circuit 107 (the special figure by the light emission). (Execute the variation effect), operate the board movable body 15K (execute the special figure variation effect by the operation).

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the special figure variation time indicated by the special figure variation pattern in the special figure variation effect timer as the time for the special figure variation effect (special figure variation effect time), and the special figure variation effect starts. The measurement of the elapsed time (elapsed time of special figure fluctuation effect) is started (S4505). The special figure variation effect time set in the special figure variation effect timer is updated every 10 ms by 10 ms by the effect timer update process in step S4202. The effect control microcomputer 91 can recognize the special figure variation effect elapsed time by the special figure variation effect timer.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a precursor effect effect execution determination process for determining whether or not to execute the precursor effect gas (S4506). Here, the precursor effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 64.

The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not it is currently in the normal effect mode in the precursor effect effect execution determination process (S4601). This is because the precursory effect is an effect performed in the normal effect mode. If it is not in the normal effect mode (NO in S4601), the precursor effect effect execution judgment process is completed, and the process returns to the special figure variation effect start process in step S4306. It is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the figure fluctuation effect is usually a loss fluctuation (S4602). This is because the precursor effect is usually performed by the special figure variation effect of the loss fluctuation. If it is not a normal loss fluctuation (NO in S4602), the precursor effect effect execution judgment process is completed, and the process returns to the special figure fluctuation effect start process in step S4306. The value indicated by the random number counter is acquired as a random number for determining the execution of the precursor effect (S4603), and the execution determination of the precursor effect is performed based on the acquired random number for determining the execution of the precursor effect (S4604).

The precursory effect gassing execution determination is performed using the precursory effect gassing execution determination table stored in the ROM 93. In the first embodiment, one precursor effect gassing execution determination table is provided. In the precursor effect ghost execution judgment table, the value of the random number for the precursor effect ghost execution judgment (precursor effect ghost) is determined by whether or not the precursor effect ghost can be executed so that the predetermined distribution rate (%) is obtained. Execution judgment value) is sorted. In the precursor effect gassing execution determination, the effect control microcomputer 91 collates the precursor effect gassing execution determination random number acquired in step S4603 with the precursor effect gassing execution determination table, and determines whether or not to execute the precursor effect gassing.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the result of the precursor effect effect execution determination in step S4604 is the execution of the precursor effect gas (S4605). If it is not the execution of the precursor effect (NO in S4605), the process of determining the execution of the precursor effect is completed, the process returns to the special figure variation effect start process in step S4306, and if the precursor effect is executed (YES in S4605), The precursor effect gassing start command indicating the start of the precursory effect gassing is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4606). The command to start the precursory effect is not only the precursory effect of the image performed by the image display device 7, but also the precursory effect of the sound output from the speaker 67 and the precursory effect of light emission performed by the frame lamp 66. The production content of the production content is included. When the precursor effect gassing start command set in step S4605 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 starts the special figure variation effect to be started from now on. When 1 second has elapsed from the above, the display unit 7a of the image display device 7 performs a precursory effect of the image. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 is used to display the effect content of the precursor effect effect indicated by the precursor effect effect start command transmitted to the image control board 100 while the precursor effect effect is performed by the image performed by the image control board 100. Correspondingly, the sound is output from the speaker 67 via the voice control circuit 106 (the precursory effect by voice is executed), and the frame lamp 66 is emitted through the lamp control circuit 107 (the precursory effect by light emission is generated). Execute).

Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a precursor effect gas flag indicating that the precursor effect gas is being executed in a predetermined area of the RAM 94 (S4607), and sets the time required for the precursor effect gas (precursor effect gas production time) as a precursor. Set in the production gas timer, start measuring the time elapsed since the precursor production gas is started (precursor production gas elapsed time) (S4608), finish the precursor production gas execution determination process, and change the special figure in step S4306. Return to the production start process. The precursory effect timer set in the precursory effect timer is updated every 10 ms by 10 ms by the effect timer update process in step S4202. The effect control microcomputer 91 can recognize the elapsed time of the precursor effect by the precursor effect gas timer.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command stored in step S4501 in the special figure variation effect start process, and from now on, the special figure 2 variation display is supported. It is determined whether or not the figure variation effect is started, in other words, whether or not the special figure 2 variation display is to be started (S4507). If the special figure 2 variation display is not started (NO in S4507), the special figure variation effect start process is completed, and if the special figure 2 variation display is started (YES in S4507), the connection effect flag during the auxiliary game is set. It is determined whether or not it is ON (S4508). If the connecting effect flag during the auxiliary game is not ON (NO in S4508), the special figure variation effect start processing is completed, and if the connecting effect flag during the auxiliary game is ON (YES in S4508), the connecting effect flag during the auxiliary game is turned off. (S4509), the electric chew non-winning effect prohibition flag is turned on in the predetermined area of the RAM 94 (S4510), and the special figure variation effect start process is completed. This is because, even though the special figure 2 variable display is started when the auxiliary game is being executed and the latter half of the challenge production to V is being executed, the electric chew non-winning production is performed when the auxiliary game is completed. This is to prevent it from being started.

[Hold icon shift processing]
Next, the hold icon shift process will be described with reference to FIG. 65. In the hold icon shift process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first sets the hold icon shift start command in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4701). When the set hold icon shift start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays everything displayed in the hold display area 73a of the display unit 7a. Move each of the hold icons to the left, in other words, move each hold icon so that the hold order is reduced by one.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 will start the special figure variation effect based on the stored hold order related to each start winning command and the hold change notice data associated with each start winning command. Judges whether or not to give a notice of pending change at (S4702). If the hold change notice is not given (NO in S4702), proceed to step S4708, and if the hold change notice is given (YES in S4702), the special figure change effect time of the special figure change effect to be started is usually C. Determine if it is longer than the fluctuation time (4 seconds) (S4703). This is because if the special figure fluctuation effect time of the special figure fluctuation effect is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the normal C loss fluctuation, it is not possible to execute the pending change notice during the change accompanied by the retention sign effect, so that the normal C This is because the type of pending change notice that can be executed differs depending on whether or not it is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the loss fluctuation. In addition, the production time of the predictive effect of the change is set to 4 seconds.

If the special figure fluctuation production time of the special figure fluctuation effect to be started is not longer than the special figure fluctuation time of normal C loss fluctuation (NO in S4703), set the hold change notice start command at shift (S4707), and hold icon Finish the shift process. When the set hold change notice start command at the time of shift is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 shifts the hold icon that is the target of the hold change notice. At that time, the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (the hold change notice at the time of shift is executed).

On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation production time of the special figure fluctuation effect to be started is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the normal C loss fluctuation (YES in S4703), the value indicated by the random number counter for the pending change notice type determination is held and changed. It is acquired as a random number for type determination (S4704), and the pending change notice type determination is performed based on the acquired pending change notice type determination random number (S4705).

The hold change notice type determination is performed using the hold change notice type determination table stored in the ROM 93. In the first embodiment, one pending change notice type determination table is provided. As shown in FIG. 80, in the hold change notice type judgment table, a random number value for hold change notice type judgment (hold change notice type judgment value) is set in the hold change notice type so as to have a predetermined distribution rate (%). ) Are sorted. In the first embodiment, the hold change notice type determination value is assigned by 50% to the hold change notice at the time of shift and the hold change notice during change. In the hold change notice type determination, the effect control microcomputer 91 collates the hold change notice type determination random number acquired in step S4704 with the hold change notice type determination table, and determines the hold change notice type.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sends a hold change notice effect start command (a shift hold change notice start command or a changing hold change notice start command) corresponding to the hold change notice type determined in step S4705 to the output buffer of the RAM 94. Set to (S4706) to finish the hold icon shift process. When the set variable pending change notice start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 holds the command 1 second after the special figure variation effect is started. The change sign effect is started, and the display mode of the hold icon that is the target of the hold change notice is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (the hold change notice is executed during the change).

When the effect control microcomputer 91 determines in step S4702 that the hold change notice is not performed (NO in S4702), it determines whether or not it is currently in the normal effect mode (S4708). If it is not the normal effect mode (NO in S4708), the hold icon shift process is completed, and if it is the normal effect mode (YES in S4708), it is determined whether or not the challenge effect to V is being executed (S4709). If the challenge effect to V is being executed (YES in S4709), the hold icon shift process is completed, and if the challenge effect to V is not being executed (NO in S4709), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is "1" or more. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the hold icon corresponding to the special figure 1 hold is displayed (S4710). If the number of special figure 1 hold is not "1" or more (NO in S4710), the hold icon shift process is completed, and if the number of special figure 1 hold is "1" or more (YES in S4710), the special figure change to be started from now on. It is determined whether or not the special figure variation effect time of the effect is longer than the special figure variation time (4 seconds) of the normal C loss variation (S4711). This is because if the special figure variation effect time of the special figure variation effect is longer than the special figure variation time of the normal C loss variation, the retention sign effect effect cannot be executed during the special figure variation effect.

If the special figure fluctuation production time of the special figure fluctuation effect to be started is not longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the normal C loss fluctuation (NO in S4711), the hold icon shift process is completed and the special figure fluctuation production to be started from now on. If the figure fluctuation effect time is longer than the special figure variation time of the normal C loss fluctuation (YES in S4711), the value indicated by the random number counter for the retention predictive effect effect Gase execution judgment is acquired as the random number for the retention sign effect effect Gase execution judgment (YES). S4712), based on the acquired random number for determining the execution of the predictive effect of the change, the execution of the predictive effect of the change is determined (S4713).

The retention predictive effect effect Gase execution determination is performed using the retention predictive effect effect Gase execution determination table stored in the ROM 93. In the first embodiment, four tables for determining the execution of the retention sign effect are provided in association with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. As shown in FIG. 81, in each of the change predictive effect effect Gase execution determination tables, a random number for determining the change predictor effect effect Gase execution is determined by whether or not the change predictor effect Gase is executed so as to have a predetermined distribution rate (%). (Random number sign production Gase execution judgment value) is distributed. The effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the special figure change pattern indicated by the special figure change start command stored in step S4501 in the change predictive effect effect Gase execution determination, and the change change associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. Select the predictive effect Gase execution judgment table, collate the random number for the predictive effect Gase execution judgment acquired in step S4712 with the selected predictive effect Gase execution judgment table, and decide whether or not to execute the predictive effect Gase. To do.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the result of the retention sign effect effect Gase execution determination is the execution of the retention sign effect effect Gase (S4714). If the hold icon shift process is not executed (NO in S4714), and if the hold icon shift process is executed (YES in S4714), the effect of the change sign effect is shown. The effect gassing start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4715), and the hold icon shift process is completed. When the set retention sign effect gasset start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 retains one second after the special figure variation effect is started. Start the change sign production ghost.

[Precursor production regulation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the precursor effect regulation process relating to the regulation of the precursor effect A will be described. In the precursor effect regulation process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not the precursor effect flag is ON (S4801). If the precursor effect flag is not ON (NO in S4801), the precursor effect regulation process is completed, and if the precursor effect flag is ON (YES in S4801), the precursor effect regulation flag indicating that the precursor effect A is regulated is set. Turn on the predetermined area of the RAM 94 (S4802), set the time to regulate the precursor effect (precursor effect regulation time) in the precursor effect regulation timer, and start measuring the time elapsed after the precursor effect is regulated (S4803). ), Set the precursor effect regulation start command indicating that the precursor effect is regulated in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4804), and end the precursor effect regulation process.

In addition, the precursor effect regulation time is set to be the same as the special figure confirmation time of the special figure stop display to be performed from now on. The precursor effect regulation time set in the precursor effect regulation timer is updated every 10 ms by 10 ms by the effect timer update process in step S4202. The effect control microcomputer 91 can recognize the time elapsed since the precursor effect A is regulated by the precursor effect regulation timer. Further, when the set precursor effect regulation start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 is in the stop display as shown in FIG. 36 (B). In order to make it easy to visually recognize the contents of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3, the reduced screen image G10 is displayed in a range smaller than the normal precursor effect A and does not overlap with the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 as much as possible. If it is the precursor effect A of the above, the second background image G111 for the precursor effect and the title image G9 to be displayed in the normal area of the display unit 7a are displayed in the reduced screen image G10 (special area).

[Reduced screen display end judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a reduced screen display end determination process for determining whether or not to end the display of the reduced screen image G10 related to the challenge effect on V will be described. In the reduction screen display end determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not the challenge effect to V is currently being executed (S4901). This is because the reduced screen image G10 can be displayed during the execution of the challenge effect on V. It should be noted that the challenge effect to V here also includes a connection effect (auxiliary game connection effect and special figure 1 variable connection effect).

The effect control microcomputer 91 finishes the reduction screen display end determination process unless the challenge effect to V is being executed (NO in S4901), and is reduced if the challenge effect to V is being executed (YES in S4901). It is determined whether or not the target of the stop display of the special figure stop display related to the special figure change stop command caused by the screen display end determination process is the special figure 1 (S4902). This is because the display of the reduced screen image G10 is terminated when the stop display of the special figure 1 is performed. If it is not special figure 1 (NO in S4902), the process proceeds to step S4907, and if it is special figure 1 (YES in S4902), it is determined whether or not the stopped display special figure 1 is a jackpot symbol (S4903).

If it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S4903), the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the challenge effect end command to V indicating that the challenge effect to V is forcibly terminated in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4904), and reduces the size. A reduced screen display end command indicating that the display of the screen image G10 is terminated is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4906), and the reduced screen display end determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the challenge production to V here also includes an auxiliary game connection production.

When the set reduced screen display end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 receives the command and the special figure confirmation time elapses. The reduced screen image G10 displayed on the display unit 7a is erased, and the display unit 7a is returned from the special state to the normal state. Further, when the set V challenge effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 sends the reduced screen display end command set in step S4906. With the erasure of the reduced screen image G10 according to the above, the challenge effect to V is forcibly terminated. Therefore, even if the challenge production to V is being executed, if the jackpot is won, the challenge production to V is forcibly terminated and the jackpot game production is started.

On the other hand, if the stop-displayed special figure 1 is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S4903), whether or not the special figure 2 hold number = 1, that is, when the special figure confirmation time elapses after the special figure variation display is stopped. Special Figure 2 Determines whether or not variable display can be started (S4905). If the special figure 2 hold number = 1 (YES in S4905), the process proceeds to step S4906, and if the special figure 2 hold number = 1 (NO in S4905), the reduced screen display end determination process is completed.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines in step S4907 whether or not the stop-displayed special figure 2 is a lost special figure. If the effect control microcomputer 91 finishes the reduction screen display end determination process if it is not a lost special figure (NO in S4907), and if it is a lost special figure (YES in S4907), whether or not the special figure 2 hold number = 1. (S4908). If the special figure 2 hold number is not = 1 (NO in S4908), the reduced screen display end determination process is completed, and if the special figure 2 hold number is 1 (YES in S4908), the second special figure 2 variable display is performed. The second half of the challenge effect to V, which indicates the start of the second half of the challenge effect to V, is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S4909), and the reduced screen display end determination process is terminated. When the second start command for the second half of the challenge effect to the set V is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 responds to the following special figure 2 variation display. When the second half of the challenge effect to V (special figure variation effect) is started, the last challenge number notification image G24 indicating the number of executions of the last challenge is displayed on the display unit 7a. Specifically, if the latter half of the first challenge production to V is the latter half of the normal V challenge production, the number of executions of the last challenge first performed in the second half of the second V challenge production is "second time". Therefore, the last challenge number notification image G24 representing “2ND” representing 2 times is displayed. On the other hand, if the latter half of the first challenge production to V is the latter half of the challenge production to the resurrection V, the number of executions of the last challenge first performed in the second half of the second challenge production to V is "third". Therefore, the last challenge number notification image G24 representing "3rd" representing 3 times is displayed.

[Public map fluctuation production judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a normal map variation effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the normal map variation effect (precursor effect + first half of the challenge effect to V, etc.) and the effect content when the execution is performed will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not it is currently in the normal effect mode in the normal figure variation effect determination process (S5001). This is because the normal figure variation effect is an effect performed in the normal effect mode.

If the effect control microcomputer 91 is not in the normal effect mode (NO in S5001) and finishes the normal figure variation effect determination process, and is in the normal effect mode (YES in S5001), it is currently in a special game or is variable in special figure 2. Determine if it is being displayed (S5002). This is because the large winning openings 30 and 32 are opened, and the execution of the normal map variation effect is regulated (prohibited) during the special game, which is a favorable situation for the player. Further, the fact that the special figure 2 variable display is in progress is because the latter half of the challenge effect to V is being performed, and therefore the execution of the normal figure variable display is restricted (prohibited) during the special figure 2 variable display.

If the effect control microcomputer 91 is in the special game or the special figure 2 variable display (YES in S5002), the effect control microcomputer 91 has finished the normal figure variation effect determination process and is not in the special game or the special figure 2 variable display (YES). NO) in S5002), based on the information (normal figure fluctuation pattern) indicated by the normal figure fluctuation start command stored in the receive buffer in the reception interrupt processing, the normal figure fluctuation display to be started from now on is the normal figure A or the normal figure B. It is determined whether or not the display is variable (S5003). If the winning symbol A or the winning symbol B is displayed in a variable manner (YES in S5003), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 1 is "1" or more (S5004). This is because the precursor effect and the first half of the challenge effect to V are performed when the hit symbol A or the hit symbol B is displayed in a variable manner. If the number of special figure 1 hold is "1" or more (YES in S5004), select the precursor effect type judgment table for special figure 1 hold (S5005) and proceed to step S5007, and the number of special figure 1 hold is " If it is not 1 ”or higher (NO in S5004), select the precursor effect type judgment table for Special Figure 1 No Hold and proceed to step S5007 (S5006).

As shown in FIG. 82, in each precursor effect type determination table, precursors are assigned to precursor effect types (precursor effect A and precursor effect B) so as to have a predetermined distribution rate (%) (described in FIG. 82). The value of the random number for determining the effect type (precursor effect type determination value) is distributed. The precursor effect types include a precursor effect A accompanied by a stepwise reduction of the reduced screen image G10 and a precursor effect B accompanied by a change predictive effect.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value indicated by the random number counter for determining the precursor effect type as a random number for determining the precursor effect type (S5007), and determines the precursor effect type based on the acquired random number for determining the precursor effect type. Do (S5008).

In the precursor effect type determination, the effect control microcomputer 91 collates the precursor effect type determination random number acquired in step S5007 with the precursor effect type determination table selected in step S5005 or step S5006, and determines the precursor effect type.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the precursor effect type data representing the precursor effect type in the predetermined area of the RAM 94 (S5009), and proceeds to step S5010.

In step S5010, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the normal figure variation display to be started from now on is the normal figure variation display of the winning symbol A. If it is the normal symbol variation display of the hit symbol A (YES in S5010), select the first challenge effect pattern judgment table for the hit symbol A (S5011) and proceed to step S5013, and the normal symbol variation display of the hit symbol A must be displayed. If (NO in S5010), select the first challenge effect pattern judgment table for the winning symbol B (S5012) and proceed to step S5013.

As shown in FIG. 83, in each first challenge effect pattern determination table, the first challenge effect pattern determination table is used for determining the first challenge effect pattern so as to have a predetermined distribution rate (%) (described in FIG. 83). Random number values (first challenge production pattern judgment value) are distributed. The first challenge production pattern includes a first challenge production pattern 01 to a first challenge production pattern 03 indicating the production content of the first challenge production. The first challenge effect pattern 01 indicates that the color of the above-mentioned first challenge content explanation image G12 is red. The first challenge effect pattern 02 indicates that the color of the first challenge content explanation image G12 is green. The first challenge effect pattern 03 indicates that the color of the first challenge content explanation image G12 is white.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value indicated by the first challenge effect pattern determination random number counter as the first challenge effect pattern determination random number (S5013), and the first challenge is based on the acquired first challenge effect pattern determination random number. Judge the production pattern (S5014).

In the first challenge effect pattern determination, the effect control microcomputer 91 collates the first challenge effect pattern determination random number acquired in step S5013 with the first challenge effect pattern determination table selected in step S5011 or step S5012, and collates the first challenge effect pattern determination random number. To determine.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the first challenge effect data representing the first challenge effect pattern in a predetermined area of the RAM 94 (S5015), and determines the determination result of the precursor effect type determination in step S5008 (precursor effect type) and step S5014. Set the normal map variation effect start command including the judgment result of the first challenge effect pattern determination (first challenge effect pattern) in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S5016), and indicate that the precursor effect is being executed. The effect flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 94 (S5017), the effect time of the precursor effect (precursor effect time) is set in the precursor effect timer, and the time elapsed from the start of the precursor effect is measured (S5018). , Ends the normal map fluctuation effect determination process.

The precursor effect time set in the precursor effect timer is updated every 10 ms by 10 ms by the effect timer update process in step S4202. The effect control microcomputer 91 can recognize the time elapsed from the start of the precursor effect by the precursor effect timer. Further, when the set normal map variation effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads a predetermined effect image from the control ROM 103 and reads the predetermined effect image. The display unit 7a of the image display device 7 performs a normal map variation effect using an image. Further, in the effect control microcomputer 91, while the normal figure variation effect by the image performed by the image control board 100 is being performed, the normal figure variation effect indicated by the normal figure variation effect start command transmitted to the image control board 100 is performed. Depending on the content of the effect, the sound is output from the speaker 67 via the voice control circuit 106 (the normal figure variation effect by voice is executed, and the special figure variation effect by voice is switched to the normal figure variation effect by voice). The frame lamp 66 is made to emit light via the lamp control circuit 107 (the normal figure variation effect by light emission is executed, and the special figure variation effect by light emission is switched to the normal figure variation effect by light emission).

[Processing at the start of auxiliary game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the processing at the start of the auxiliary game according to the start of the long open auxiliary game will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not it is currently in the normal effect mode in the process at the start of the auxiliary game (S5101). If it is not in the normal production mode (NO in S5101), the processing at the start of the auxiliary game is completed, and if it is in the normal production mode (YES in S5101), it will start from now on based on the information (win symbol type) indicated by the winning opening command. It is determined whether or not the auxiliary game is an auxiliary game (long open auxiliary game) according to the winning symbol A (S5102). If it is not the auxiliary game of the winning symbol A (NO in S5102), the processing at the start of the auxiliary game is completed, and if it is the auxiliary game of the winning symbol A (YES in S5102), the auxiliary game corresponding to the winning symbol A in the normal game state (NO). The auxiliary game in-game flag indicating that the long open auxiliary game) is being executed is turned on in the predetermined area of the RAM 94 (S5103), and the auxiliary game start processing is completed.

[Processing at the end of auxiliary game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the processing at the end of the auxiliary game corresponding to the end of the auxiliary game in which the electric chew 23 is long-opened in the normal effect mode will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not the auxiliary game in-game flag is ON in the processing at the end of the auxiliary game (S5201). If the auxiliary game flag is not ON (NO in S5201), the processing at the end of the auxiliary game is completed, and if the auxiliary game flag is ON (YES in S5201), the auxiliary game flag is turned OFF (S5202) and assisted. It is determined whether or not the connection effect flag is ON during the game (S5203). If the auxiliary game connecting effect flag is not ON (NO in S5203), proceed to step S5207, and if the auxiliary game in progress flag is ON (YES in S5203), the auxiliary game connecting effect flag is turned off (S5204), and now , Special Figure 1 Determines whether or not the variable display is in progress (S5205).

The effect control microcomputer 91 finishes the processing at the end of the auxiliary game unless the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed (NO in S5205), and if the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed (YES in S5205), the special figure 1 variable display is connected. Special figure 1 showing the effect content of the effect Set the command to start the connecting effect during fluctuation in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S5206), and end the processing at the end of the auxiliary game. When the set special figure 1 variable connecting effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads a predetermined effect image from the control ROM 103. , The display unit 7a of the image display device 7 performs a joint effect during the fluctuation of the special figure 1.

Further, in step S5207, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the electric chew non-winning effect prohibition flag is ON. If the electric chew non-winning effect prohibition flag is ON (YES in S5207), the electric chew non-winning effect prohibition flag is turned off (S5208), the processing at the end of the auxiliary game is completed, and the electric chew non-winning effect prohibition flag is ON. If not (NO in S5207), the electric chew non-winning effect start command indicating the effect content of the electric chew non-winning effect is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S5209), and the processing at the end of the auxiliary game is completed. When the set electric chew non-winning effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads a predetermined effect image from the control ROM 103 and displays the image. The display unit 7a of the display device 7 performs an electric chew non-winning effect.

[Precursor production regulation release judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the precursor effect regulation release determination process for canceling the regulation of the regulated precursor effect A will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not the precursor effect regulation flag is ON in the precursor effect regulation release determination process (S5301).

If the precursor effect regulation flag is not ON (NO in S5301), the effect control microcomputer 91 finishes the precursor effect regulation release determination process, and if the precursor effect regulation flag is ON (YES in S5301), the regulation of the precursor effect A is performed. Whether or not it is time to release the regulation of the precursory effect after the precursory effect regulation time has passed since the start of the above, in other words, the precursory effect regulation timer = 0 in which the precursory effect regulation time is set in step S4803. Determine if it has become (S5302).

The effect control microcomputer 91 completes the precursor effect regulation release determination process if the precursor effect regulation time has not passed (NO in S5302), and if the precursor effect regulation time has elapsed (YES in S5302), the precursor effect regulation The flag is turned off (S5303), the precursor effect regulation end command indicating that the regulation of the precursor effect A is terminated (released) is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94 (S5304), and the precursor effect regulation release determination process is terminated.

When the set precursor effect regulation end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4004), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the effect symbol in the normal area of the display unit 7a. EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are erased, and the second background image G111 for the precursor effect, the title image G9, and the like are displayed in the normal area of the display unit 7a in the same manner as the normal precursor effect A, and the first background image for the precursor effect is displayed. A reduced screen image G10 including G110 is displayed (see FIG. 36C). If the precursor effect A is not regulated, the reduced screen image G10 including the precursor effect first background image G110 to be displayed at this time is displayed from the time when the precursor effect A is displayed.

7. Other Modification Examples Hereinafter, the gaming machine of the present invention will be described as a modification of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment, an image display device 7 is provided as a device capable of displaying an image, and when the image display device 7 starts the normal figure variation display of the hit symbol A or the hit symbol B, a reduced screen is displayed. The reduced screen image G10 that displays the image G10 and displays the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the normal background images G100, and the icons HA1 to HA4 that were displayed on the display unit 7a before the reduced screen image G10 is displayed as a special area. In the normal area where these images were displayed, a precursor effect, a challenge effect to V, and a connection effect are performed. However, the destinations for moving the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the normal background image G100, and the icons HA1 to HA4 are not limited to the reduced screen image G10 as a special area. For example, in the game board 2, in addition to the image display device 7, a display device smaller than the image display device 7 and capable of displaying an image is provided at a predetermined position (for example, a position where a board movable body 15K is provided). It is provided on the front side of the upper end portion of the display unit 7a, the lower end portion of the display unit 7a, and the front side of the left or right portion), and when the normal drawing variation display of the hit symbol A or the hit symbol B is started. , The effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the normal background images G100, and the icons HA1 to HA4, which had been performed on the display unit 7a until then, are moved to the display device, and the special figure variation which has been performed on the display device until then. You may continue the production and the hold production. Further, the display device other than the image display device 7 may be provided on the upper plate 61 instead of the game board 2, and the display surface thereof may be substantially flush with the upper surface of the upper plate 61. That is, a display device other than the image display device 7 may be provided at a position where it is more difficult for the player who sees the display unit 7a to see the display unit 7a.

Further, in the first embodiment, the normal figure variation effect that fails in the first challenge effect when the normal figure variation display of the symbol B that generates the short opening auxiliary game is performed, but this normal figure variation effect is performed. Is not limited to the normal map variation display of the hit symbol B. For example, the type of hit symbol is only hit symbol A, and during the normal figure fluctuation time when the lost normal figure is used, the first challenge effect is executed as the normal figure fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) for which the first challenge effect is prohibited. There is a possible fluctuation time of the normal map (for example, 25 seconds), and the fluctuation time of the normal map capable of executing the first challenge effect may be selected with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%).

Further, in the first embodiment, one type of the normal figure fluctuation time of the hit symbol A and one type of the normal figure fluctuation time of the hit symbol B are set, but a plurality of types are set for both or one of them, and a plurality of types are set. Those may be decided by a predetermined lottery. That is, a plurality of production times for the precursor effect and the first challenge effect (the first half of the challenge effect to V) may be set. In this case, for example, the longer the production time of the first challenge production (the first half of the challenge production to V), the higher the expectation that the long opening auxiliary game will be executed. Further, the longer the effect time of the precursor effect is, the higher the expectation that the challenge effect to V will be executed may be increased.

Further, in the first embodiment, one type of special figure fluctuation time is set for each of the success of the second half of the challenge effect on the normal V and the failure of the second half of the challenge effect on the normal V, but there are a plurality of types for both or one of them. It may be set, and a plurality of types may be determined by a predetermined lottery. That is, a plurality of production times for the last challenge production (the latter half of the normal V challenge production) may be set. In this case, for example, the longer the production time of the last challenge production (the latter half of the challenge production to the normal V), the higher the expectation that the special game will be executed. The same applies to the latter half of the challenge production for Revival V.

Further, in the first embodiment, as an auxiliary game in which the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 22, only the auxiliary game corresponding to the winning symbol A is set, but the opening time of the second starting port 22 is different. A plurality of auxiliary games may be set. For example, an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 22 is opened once for 2.5 seconds (disadvantageous long opening auxiliary game) and an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 22 is opened for 2.5 seconds twice (advantageous long). (Opening auxiliary game) and may be provided. In this case, the winning symbol that generates the disadvantageous long opening assisting game and the winning symbol that generates the advantageous long opening assisting game may be provided differently. Further, in this case, the degree of expectation for the execution of the advantageous long opening auxiliary game may be suggested by the first half of the challenge effect to V (for example, the first challenge effect) and the effect content / effect time of the precursor effect.

Although only one type of V-passing small hit game is set, a plurality of types of V-passing small hit games having different easiness of V-passing may be provided. For example, a V-passing small hit game with an OP time of 0.008 seconds (advantageous V-passing small hit game) and a V-passing small hit game with an OP time of 3.7 seconds (disadvantageous V-passing) have the same opening time. A small hit game) may be provided. In this case, since the V is opened for 4.6 seconds from the time when 0.008 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit opening, the V-passing small hit game with an OP time of 0.008 seconds is easier to pass V. Then, in this case, the degree of expectation for the execution of the advantageous V passing small hit game may be suggested by the production content and production time of the latter half of the challenge production to the normal V (for example, the last challenge production).

Further, in the first embodiment, the resurrection challenge production can be executed in the latter half of the challenge production to V, but the resurrection challenge production may not be provided. Also, unlike the resurrection challenge production, there are cases where success and failure occur in the second and final challenge, but from the temporary stop display of the production symbol that shows the loss after failing in the first and final challenge. , The notification effect to notify the big hit or small hit win is made possible, and the second half of the challenge effect to V after the temporary stop display of the effect symbol showing the loss after failing in the first final challenge (special figure variation effect) If this continues, the notification of the big hit or small hit may be made without losing.

Further, the production contents of the first half of the challenge production for V and the second half of the challenge production for V are not limited to the first embodiment and can be appropriately set. It suffices if the first half of the challenge production for V and the second half of the challenge production for V have a relationship. The relevance here does not require continuity that develops from the first challenge production (first challenge) to the last challenge production (last challenge). From a broad perspective, the first half of the challenge to V and the second half of the challenge to V can be regarded as one integrated production.

Further, in the first embodiment, the execution of the precursor effect is restricted during the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3, that is, during the special symbol stop display. As a result, the temporary stop display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 immediately before the stop display may be included. In this case, the regulation may be started from the time when one of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is temporarily stopped, and the regulation is started from the time when all of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are temporarily stopped. Is also good.

Further, in the first embodiment, as the types of precursory effects that suggest the degree of expectation for the execution of the challenge effect to V (the first half of the challenge effect to V) (the degree of expectation to execute the challenge effect to V), the precursor effect A and the precursor Two types of production B are provided, but there may be three or more types or one type. Further, in the first embodiment, there is no difference in the degree of expectation for executing the challenge effect to V regardless of the type of precursor effect (see FIG. 82), but the expectation for executing the challenge effect to V depends on the type of precursor effect. It may be configured to have different degrees. Further, in the first embodiment, there is only one type of effect mode for the precursor effect A and the precursor effect B, but a plurality of effect modes may be set for both or either of them. In this case, the degree of expectation for executing the challenge effect on V may be different or the same depending on the effect mode of the precursor effect.

Further, in the first embodiment, the execution of the pending change notice, the execution of the challenge effect to V, or the effect in which any of the effects branches unexecuted, that is, the challenge effect to V (the first half of the challenge effect to V). Although there is only one type of predictive effect (precursor effect B) that also serves as a precursor effect, a plurality of types may be provided. In this case, the degree of expectation for executing the challenge effect on V may be different or the same depending on the type of effect of the predictive effect.

Further, in the first embodiment, the electric chew operation promotion effect is performed from the time when the normal map fluctuation display is performed, that is, as a part of the normal map fluctuation effect, but the electric chew operation promotion effect is long. It may be executed at the start of the opening assist game. That is, the precursor effect and the first challenge effect may be performed in the normal map variation effect.

In addition, the precursor effect is executed with the start of the variable display of the normal map, but the variable display of the normal map is also configured to be holdable like the variable display of the special figure, and the random numbers related to the normal map are acquired. Then, a command such as a start winning command that can identify the pre-judgment result is configured to be transmitted, and based on the information that can be obtained from the command, the normal symbol variation display of the winning symbol A or the winning symbol B is started. The precursory effect may be made feasible from the front. Further, based on the information that can be acquired from the command, the precursor effect gassing may be executed when the normal figure variation display of the hit symbol A or the hit symbol B is not performed.

Further, in the first embodiment, the electric chew non-winning effect is performed according to the fact that the game ball could not win the electric chew 23 during the long opening assist game, but the electric chew non-winning effect is not provided. Is also good. In addition, although the connecting effect during the auxiliary game is performed in response to the game ball winning the electric chew 23 during the long opening auxiliary game, the connecting effect during the auxiliary game is not executed, and as a connecting effect, Special Figure 1 It may be configured so that only the connecting effect is performed during the fluctuation. It should be noted that the effects of the electric chew non-winning effect, the auxiliary game connecting effect, and the special figure 1 variable connecting effect are not limited to the first embodiment, and can be appropriately set.

Further, in the first embodiment, the reduced screen image G10 (display unit 7a) is used from the start of the precursor effect A to the start of the first challenge effect (FIGS. 24 (B) to 25 (B-1)). In the special area), the precursor effect A in which the first background image G110 for the precursor effect is displayed is performed, but the small symbols KZ1 to which were displayed on the display unit 7a until just before the reduced screen image G10 is displayed. It is also possible to continue the special figure variation effect excluding the variable display of KZ3.

Further, in the first embodiment, there is a possibility that a big hit will be won in the special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 lottery, but at least one of them may not include the big hit. In addition, the probability of winning a small hit is the same in the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, but the big hit game executed by the two kinds of big hits when the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery. It may be set so that the specified number of time reductions in the later time reduction state is increased. In addition, there may be no two-kind jackpot, and the special figure 2 lottery may be able to win a jackpot symbol that generates a jackpot game with a large number of substantial round games with a high probability. ..

Further, in the first embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special figure lottery (type 1 jackpot) is constant, but the probability of winning the jackpot is higher than the normal probability state of the normal probability and the normal probability. A high probability high probability state may be set. In this case, there is a round game in which the second big winning opening 32 is opened during the big hit game, the specific area 34 can be opened while the second big winning opening 32 is open, and when V is passed during the big hit game, the big hit The game state after the game may be set to a high probability state. Then, there are a jackpot game that is relatively easy to pass through V and a jackpot game that is relatively difficult to pass through V. In the special figure 2 lottery, the jackpot symbol that generates the jackpot game that is relatively easy to pass through V is won with a high probability. You may be able to do it. Further, as a condition for setting the gaming state after the jackpot game to a high probability state, the type of jackpot symbol may be used instead of passing through V. In this case, the winning probability of the jackpot symbol whose game state after the jackpot game is set to the high probability state is the same in the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, but the special figure 2 lottery is more substantial. It may be possible to win a jackpot symbol that generates a jackpot game with a large number of round games with a high probability.

In paragraphs 0497 to 0498, the configuration in which the special figure 2 lottery may be more advantageous to the player is mentioned, but these are appropriately combined so that the special figure 2 lottery is more advantageous to the player. You may.

Further, in the first embodiment, the time saving state is always set at the end of the big hit game, but even if it is determined whether or not the time saving state is set according to the type of the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol. good. In this case, the special figure 2 lottery may be able to win the jackpot symbol whose time reduction state is set with the end of the jackpot game with a higher probability.

Further, in the first embodiment, the distribution device 36 operates in a certain mode from the start of the small hit game, in other words, the specific area 34 opens and closes in a certain mode from the start of the small hit game, and this operation mode ( One type of opening / closing mode is set, but a plurality of types of operating modes (opening / closing mode) are set, and the second special winning opening 32 is won (the second large winning opening sensor 32a detects the game ball). ) May be used to switch the operation mode (opening / closing mode).

Further, in the first embodiment, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are variablely displayed substantially in synchronization with the special symbol variable display, but it may be composed of three symbols such as the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3. Instead, it may be composed of symbols other than three, such as two. For example, two symbols divided into special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be provided. Further, one symbol common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be provided. Then, in these cases, the display unit 7a of the image display device 7 may display the image, and the sub-control board 90 may control the display. Further, an LED device for displaying a symbol may be provided in an area other than the game area 3 of the center decoration body 10 or the game board 2. In this case, the control of the LED device may be performed by the main control board 80 or the sub control board 90.

Further, in the first embodiment, the upper limit value of the special figure 1 hold number is "4" and the upper limit value of the special figure 2 hold number is "1", but the upper limit value is not limited to these values. It may be set appropriately. Further, in the first embodiment, the function of holding the variable display of the normal figure is not provided as in the variable display of the special figure, but the variable display of the normal figure can also be held within the range of the predetermined upper limit value. Is also good. Furthermore, it is not necessary to set an upper limit value for the number of special figures held and the number of ordinary figures held.

Further, in the first embodiment, the special figure 2 hold is preferentially digested, but the special figure 1 hold may be preferentially digested. Further, the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold may be digested in the order in which they occur.

Further, in the first embodiment, the main control board 80 performs basic control related to the progress of the game, and the sub control board 90 performs basic control related to the progress of the effect according to the progress of the game (control of the game). Although the game control and the effect control are performed on different boards, it may be configured to be performed on one board. In this case, the image control board 100 may be included in the one board, or may be provided separately from the one board.

It is also possible to apply the game machine of the present invention to other ball game machines such as an arrange ball machine and a sparrow ball game machine.

Further, in the first embodiment, when one type of jackpot is performed while performing the normal map variation effect or the auxiliary game effect (challenge effect to V), the reduced screen image G10 is erased and the normal map variation effect or auxiliary is performed. The game effect (challenge effect to V) is forcibly terminated, and the jackpot game effect is performed on the display unit 7a in the normal state. Here, the same applies when two types of big hits are made. For example, when a normal figure variation effect or an auxiliary game effect (challenge effect to V) is being executed, if V is passed in a small hit game (V non-passing small hit game) corresponding to the small hit symbol 1, the V When the jackpot game based on passing is started, the reduced screen image G10 is erased, the normal figure variation effect or the auxiliary game effect (challenge effect to V) is forcibly terminated, and the display unit 7a in the normal state is displayed. It is assumed that a jackpot game production is performed.

In addition, if one type of jackpot or two types of jackpot is performed while performing a normal figure fluctuation effect or an auxiliary game effect (challenge effect to V), the reduced screen image G10 is not erased, that is, the display unit 7a is displayed. While maintaining the special state, the normal map variation effect or the auxiliary game effect may be transferred to the reduced screen image G10 (special area) and executed as it is, and the jackpot game effect corresponding to the jackpot game may be performed in the normal area. In addition, if a type 1 jackpot or a type 2 jackpot is performed while performing a normal map fluctuation effect or an auxiliary game effect (challenge effect to V), the display unit 7a is kept in a special state, and the normal figure variation effect is produced. Alternatively, the auxiliary game effect may be performed as it is in the normal area, and the jackpot game effect corresponding to the jackpot game may be performed in the reduced screen image G10 (special area).

Further, in the first embodiment, in the normal effect mode, every time the special figure variation effect is performed 50 times without winning a big hit, the daytime normal background image G100 → the evening normal background image G102 → the nighttime normal background. The normal background image is switched in a predetermined order from the image G101 to the daytime normal background image G100, but it is normal even if the small hit game performed by winning the small hit in the normal game state does not pass V. The background image may be switched. Therefore, for example, when the small hit game performed by winning the small hit while the daytime normal background image G100 is displayed does not pass V, the daytime normal background image G100 to the evening in the ending of the small hit game. It switches to the normal background image G102. Then, on the premise that the background image for normal use is switched in this way, in the normal production mode, V cannot be passed in the small hit game performed by winning the small hit in the special figure 1 lottery, and the ending of the small hit game. When the reduced screen image G10 is sometimes displayed, the normal background image may be switched in the reduced screen image G10.

Further, in the first embodiment, the stop display of the special figure 1 is performed in the situation where the special figure 2 is not held, and the customer waiting state (the state in which neither the special figure variable display nor the special game is performed: the customer waiting flag is set. The reduced screen image G10 continues to be displayed even when the state (ON state) is entered (see FIG. 67). Here, if the normal figure fluctuation effect or the auxiliary game effect is still executed when the customer waiting effect waiting time elapses after entering the customer waiting state, the customer is displayed on the reduced screen image G10 (special area of the display unit 7a). It is assumed that the waiting production is started.

Further, as a result of the game ball passing through the gate 28 in a situation where the customer waiting effect is being performed on the display unit 7a in the normal state, when the normal figure variation display of the hit symbol A or the hit symbol B is started, the display unit After the reduced screen image G10 is displayed on the 7a (the normal area and the special area are formed on the display unit 7a) and the precursor effect is performed, the first challenge effect is entered. Here, if the special figure 1 variable display is not performed at the start of the first challenge effect, the customer waiting effect is continuously performed in the reduced screen image G10 (special area of the display unit 7a).

Further, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 in a situation where a customer waiting effect is performed in the reduced screen image G10 (special area of the display unit 7a), the reduced screen image G10 (special area of the display unit 7a) is displayed. In the area), it is assumed that the special symbol variation effect including the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 is started.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the reduced screen image G10, the hold change notice is given as in the case where the reduced screen image G10 is not displayed, but the hold change is performed while the reduced screen image G10 is displayed. The execution of the notice may be restricted. The regulation here means, for example, prohibition of pending change notice and reduction of execution rate.

8. Inventions Disclosed in Embodiments The following inventions A to F are disclosed up to the preceding paragraph in this [mode for carrying out the invention]. In the description of Inventions A to F, the names and expressions of the corresponding configurations in the embodiment of the invention described above and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, elements such as means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. Invention A is a general term for the following inventions A1 to A6, invention B is a general term for the following inventions B1 to B8, invention C is a general term for the following inventions C1 to C4, and invention D is a general term for the following inventions C1 to C4. , The following inventions D1 to D6, the invention E is a general term for the following inventions E1 to E7, and the invention F is a general term for the following inventions F1 to F5.

8-1-1. Invention A1
The gaming machine according to the invention A1
Performs the first symbol display control means (steps S1102 to S1104) capable of displaying the first symbol (normal diagram) in a variable manner and then stopping the display when the first condition is satisfied (the game ball passes through the gate 28). Game control microcomputer 81) and
When the specific first symbol is stopped and displayed (hit symbol), the first specific game control means (game control microcomputer 81 that performs step S1105) capable of executing the first specific game (auxiliary game) that is advantageous to the player, and
When the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied (the game ball passes through the second starting port 22), the second symbol (special figure 2) different from the first symbol is changed and then stopped and displayed. 2nd symbol display control means (game control microcomputer 81 that performs steps S1502 to S1504) and
When the specific second symbol (small hit symbol) is stopped and displayed, the second specific game control means (step S1507) capable of executing the second specific game (small hit game) which is advantageous to the player different from the first specific game is performed. The game control microcomputer 81) and
It is characterized by comprising an effect control means (microcomputer 91 for effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (challenge effect to V) across the variation display of the first symbol and the variation display of the second symbol. Game machine.

8-1-2. Invention A2
The gaming machine according to the invention A2
A gaming machine according to invention A1.
The first specific game involves an opening mode of a first variable winning region (second starting port 22) that can take a closed mode and an open mode.
The second specific game is characterized in that, unlike the first variable winning region, the second variable winning region (second large winning opening 32) is opened, which can take a closed mode and an open mode.

8-1--3. Invention A3
The gaming machine according to the invention A3
A gaming machine according to invention A2.
The second condition is characterized in that the game ball passes through the first variable winning area.

8-1-4. Invention A4
The gaming machine according to the invention A4
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention A1 to Invention A3.
The predetermined production is
It is performed on the display unit (display unit 7a) that can display an image.
The first half effect (first half of the challenge to V) performed in the variable display of the first symbol, and the second half effect (second half of the challenge to V) performed in the variable display of the second symbol and constituting the continuation of the first half effect. It is characterized in that it is composed of.

8-1-5. Invention A5
The gaming machine according to the invention A5
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention A1 to Invention A4.
The predetermined production is
A game state control means (game control microcomputer 81) capable of controlling a normal game state or a specific game state (time saving state) in which the first variable winning area is more likely to be in the open mode than the normal game state is provided.
The effect control means is characterized in that the predetermined effect can be executed in the normal gaming state.

8-1-6. Invention A6
The gaming machine according to the invention A6
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention A2 to Invention A5.
When the game ball that has passed through the second variable winning area in the second specific game passes through the specific area (specific area 34), after the second specific game, in an advantageous gaming state (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. Controlled
The effect control means is characterized in that when the first condition is satisfied in the advantageous gaming state, the execution of the predetermined effect is restricted.

According to the invention A, there is an effect of improving the interest in the game with respect to the problem A described below regarding the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159147 as the prior art document. In the game machine described in JP-A-2016-159147, when the game ball passes through the winning gate, a variable display of a normal symbol is performed. In the variable display of the normal symbol, when the hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result after the variable display of the normal symbol, the auxiliary game accompanied by the opening of the variable second starting port is executed. Then, when the game ball enters the second starting port, the special symbol is variably displayed. In the variable display of the special symbol, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result after the variable display of the special symbol, a special game with the opening of the big winning opening is executed. Here, the normal symbol production is performed by performing the variable display of the normal symbol. In the normal drawing effect, when a specific symbol is stopped as a result of the normal drawing effect, an auxiliary game with a long opening time of the second starting port is executed. Then, during this auxiliary game, a long opening effect is performed, which suggests that the opening time is long. In addition, every time the game ball enters the second start opening during this auxiliary game, an effect (display of the second hold icon) suggesting that the ball has entered the second start opening is performed. However, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game with respect to the game machine in which such a variable display of different symbols is performed. Therefore, the subject A is to provide a new game machine that enhances the game entertainment. Then, the invention A1 is a production control means (microcomputer for effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (challenge effect to V) across the variable display of the first symbol and the variable display of the second symbol for the problem A. 91) ”, which is a configuration that the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159147 does not have, has an advantageous effect that the game entertainment can be improved.

8-2-1. Invention B1
The gaming machine according to the invention B1
The variable display of the special symbol can be executed by passing the game ball through the starting areas (starting ports 20, 22), and a specific display result (big hit symbol or small hit symbol) is derived in the variable display of the special symbol. Then, a game control means (main control board 80) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player, and
When the special symbol is variablely displayed, the effect control means (sub-control board) capable of executing the variable display of the effect symbol according to the variable display of the special symbol in a predetermined display area (display unit 7a). 90), which is a gaming machine equipped with
The game control means can execute variable display of a normal symbol when a predetermined condition is satisfied (the game ball passes through the gate 28), and a specific display result (winning symbol) is derived in the variable display of the normal symbol. Then, the auxiliary game can be executed with the open state of the variable starting area (second starting port 22) that constitutes the starting area and can be in the closed state and the open state.
When the variable display of the normal symbol is started while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, the effect control means is larger than the variable display of the effect symbol in the predetermined display area, and the normal symbol is displayed. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (normal pattern variation effect) according to the variable display of the symbol.

8-2-2. Invention B2
The gaming machine according to the invention B2 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1.
The effect control means is characterized in that the effect symbol that is variably displayed is reduced as the predetermined effect is executed.

8-2-3. Invention B3
The gaming machine according to the invention B3
A gaming machine according to invention B2.
A first display area (normal area of the display unit 7a) and a second display area smaller than the first display area (special area of the display unit 7a: reduced screen image G10) are provided.
The effect control means
When the predetermined effect is not performed, the variable display of the effect symbol can be executed in the first display area.
When the variable display of the normal symbol is started while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, the predetermined effect is performed in the first display area, and the variable display of the effect symbol is displayed in the first display area. It is possible to switch to the second display area from the above.

8-2-4. Invention B4
The gaming machine according to the invention B4
A gaming machine according to invention B3.
In the first display area, a special symbol display control means capable of executing variable display of special symbols (small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3) according to the variable display of the special symbol regardless of whether or not the predetermined effect is executed. It is characterized by having.

8-2-5. Invention B5
The gaming machine according to the invention B5
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention B1 to Invention B4.
The effect control means
When the special symbol is variablely displayed, a background image (background images G100 to G102 in the normal effect mode) that is the background of the effect symbol can be displayed in the predetermined display area.
Along with executing the predetermined effect, the effect symbol and the background image that are variably displayed are reduced.

8-2-6. Invention B6
The gaming machine according to invention B6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention B1 to Invention B4.
The effect control means
When the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, it is possible to execute a voice effect according to the variable display of the effect symbol.
As the predetermined effect is executed, the variable display of the effect symbol can be reduced, and the sound effect corresponding to the variable display of the effect symbol can be switched to the sound effect according to the predetermined effect. It is characterized by.

8-2-7. Invention B7
The gaming machine according to invention B7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention B1 to Invention B4.
The effect control means
When the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect according to the variable display of the effect symbol.
Along with executing the predetermined effect, the variable display of the effect symbol can be reduced, and the light emission effect corresponding to the variable display of the effect symbol can be switched to the light emission effect according to the predetermined effect. It is characterized by.

8-2-8. Invention B8
The gaming machine according to the invention B8
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention B1 to Invention B4.
The effect control means
When the variable display of the special symbol is performed, it is possible to execute an effect according to the variable display of the effect symbol separately from the variable display of the effect symbol.
Along with executing the predetermined effect, the variable display of the effect symbol can be reduced, and the effect corresponding to the variable display of the effect symbol can be switched to the effect according to the predetermined effect. And.

According to the invention B, there is an effect of improving the interest in the game with respect to the problem B described below for the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159147 as the prior art document. In the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159147, when the game ball enters the starting port, a variable display of a special symbol is performed. In the variable display of the special symbol, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result after the variable display of the special symbol, a special game with the opening of the big winning opening is executed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the winning gate, a variable display of a normal symbol is performed. In the variable display of the normal symbol, when the hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result after the variable display of the normal symbol, the auxiliary game accompanied by the opening of the variable second starting port, which is the starting port, is executed. Here, when the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, the special symbol lottery effect including the variable display of the effect symbol is performed in substantially the entire display area of the image display device 7. Then, for example, if the variable display of the normal symbol is started while the special figure lottery effect is being performed, the normal pattern effect may be started. When the normal drawing effect is started, an image (box B) representing a small box appears in the display area of the image display device 7 on which the special drawing lottery effect is performed. The normal drawing effect is an effect in which the reel L with a plurality of types of special effect symbols rotates in the box B. Then, it is suggested that a predetermined item (an auxiliary game having a long opening time is executed and a jackpot expectation degree) is determined according to the symbol appearing from the box B when the reel L is stopped. However, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game with respect to the game machine in which the effect is performed according to the variable display of the ordinary symbol. Therefore, the subject B is to provide a new game machine that enhances the game entertainment. Then, the invention B1 responds to the problem B by saying, "When the effect control means starts the variable display of the normal symbol while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, the effect symbol is displayed in a predetermined display area. It is larger than the variable display of the above, and a predetermined effect (general figure variation effect) corresponding to the variable display of the ordinary symbol can be executed. ”By the configuration not provided in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159147. It has the advantageous effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

8-3-1. Invention C1
The gaming machine according to the invention C1
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (the game ball enters the starting ports 20 and 22), the special symbol is changed and then stopped and displayed, and when the specific special symbol is stopped and displayed, a special game advantageous to the player is performed. Feasible and
A gaming machine capable of executing a variable display and a stop display of an effect symbol according to a variable display and a stop display of a special symbol on a display unit (display unit 7a) capable of displaying an image.
An effect control means (sub-control board 90) capable of executing a specific effect (precursor effect A) within a range in which the effect symbol is displayed on the display unit is provided.
The effect control means is characterized in that the specific effect is regulated when the stop display of the effect symbol is performed.

8-3-2. Invention C2
The gaming machine according to the invention C2
A gaming machine according to invention C1.
The effect control means is characterized in that if the specific effect is started while the variation display of the effect symbol is being performed, the effect symbol in the variation display can be hidden. To do.

8-3-3. Invention C3
The gaming machine according to the invention C3
A gaming machine according to invention C2.
Special symbol display control means (sub-control board 90) capable of executing variation display and stop display of special symbols (small symbols KZ1, KZ2, KZ3) different from the effect symbols according to the variation display and stop display of the special symbol. )
The special symbol display control means is characterized in that the display unit can execute variable display and stop display of the special symbol regardless of whether or not the specific effect is executed.

8-3-4. Invention C4
The gaming machine according to the invention C4
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention C1 to Invention C3.
The predetermined condition includes that the game ball passes through the starting area (starting ports 20, 22).
When a specific display result is derived by the variable display of a normal symbol performed by satisfying a condition different from the predetermined condition, the start area is formed and the variable start area (the first) which can be in the closed state and the open state. 2 A game control means (main control board 80) capable of executing an auxiliary game accompanied by an open state of the starting port 22) is provided.
The effect control means is characterized in that the specific effect can be executed by starting the variable display of the ordinary symbol.

According to the invention C, there is an effect of improving the interest in the game with respect to the problem C described below regarding the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208575 as a prior art document. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208575, when a gaming ball enters the starting port, a special symbol is variably displayed. In the variable display of the special symbol, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result after the variable display of the special symbol, a special game with the opening of the big winning opening is executed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the winning gate, a variable display of a normal symbol is performed. In the variable display of the normal symbol, when the hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result after the variable display of the normal symbol, the auxiliary game accompanied by the opening of the variable second starting port, which is the starting port, is executed. Here, in the display area of the image display device 7, the variable display of the effect symbol is performed according to the variable display of the special symbol. In the variable display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol is first changed according to the change display of the special symbol, and then the stop display of the effect symbol representing the stop-displayed special symbol is displayed according to the stop display of the special symbol. Will be done. In addition, when the variable display of the normal symbol is started, the roulette effect may be started. When the roulette effect is started, the rail image R1 appears in the range in which the effect symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 7. However, even if the roulette effect is started during the variable display of the effect symbol, the variation of the effect symbol may stop when the roulette effect is being executed, and the stop display of the effect symbol may be reached. In that case, the roulette effect interferes with the stop display of the effect symbol, and the game interest is reduced. Therefore, the subject C is to provide a new game machine that enhances the game entertainment. Then, the invention C1 describes the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208575, which states that "the effect control means regulates a specific effect when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed" for the problem C. It has an advantageous effect that the game entertainment can be improved by the configuration that is not provided.

8-4-1. Invention D1
The gaming machine according to the invention D1
When the first condition is satisfied (the game ball enters the starting ports 20 and 22), the first symbol (special symbol) can be changed and then stopped and displayed, and the specific first symbol (the specific first symbol) can be displayed. When the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are stopped and displayed, the game control means (main control board 80) capable of executing the first specific game (special game) which is advantageous to the player, and
A suggestion effect (suggestion effect) suggesting that a predetermined effect (pending change notice) may be executed on the display unit (display unit 7a) capable of displaying an image when the first symbol is variablely displayed. It is a gaming machine including an effect control means (sub-control board 90) capable of executing the predetermined effect after performing the change sign effect).
The game control means can execute variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) by satisfying a second condition different from the first condition (the game ball passes through the gate 28), and in the variable display. When a specific display result (winning symbol) is derived, a second specific game (auxiliary game) different from the first specific game can be executed.
The effect control means is characterized in that, after performing the suggestion effect, an effect different from the predetermined effect (normal figure variation effect) can be executed without executing the predetermined effect.

8-4-2. Invention D2
The gaming machine according to the invention D2
A gaming machine according to invention D1.
The effect different from the predetermined effect is an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second symbol based on the establishment of the second condition.
When the second condition is satisfied while the first symbol is variablely displayed, the second symbol based on the establishment of the second condition without executing the predetermined effect after performing the suggestion effect. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect according to the variable display of.

8-4-3. Invention D3
The gaming machine according to the invention D3
A gaming machine according to invention D2.
The first condition is that the game ball passes through the starting area (the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 22).
The first specific game involves an open state of a variable winning area (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 32) that can be in a closed state and an open state.
The second specific game is characterized in that it constitutes the starting region and is accompanied by an open state of a variable starting region (second starting port 22) that can be in a closed state and an open state.

8-4-4. Invention D4
The gaming machine according to the invention D4
A gaming machine according to invention D3.
The predetermined effect is characterized in that it is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the specific first symbol is stopped and displayed.

8-4-5. Invention D5
The gaming machine according to the invention D5
A gaming machine according to invention D4.
The game control means
If the first condition is satisfied when the variable display of the first symbol cannot be started, the reserved storage means (special figure) for storing the information related to the variable display of the first symbol that cannot be started as the reserved information. Hold storage 85) and
The first determination means (step S1603) for determining whether or not to stop and display the specific first symbol based on the hold information stored in the hold storage means when the variable display of the first symbol starts. Alternatively, the game control microcomputer 81) that performs step S1610 and
A game control microcomputer that performs a second determination means (step S211 or step S218) that determines whether or not to stop and display the specific first symbol prior to the determination of the first determination means when the first condition is satisfied. 81) and
The effect control means
A hold display (hold icon) corresponding to the number of hold information can be displayed in the hold display unit (hold display area 73a).
Based on the determination result by the second determination means, the predetermined effect can be executed by using the hold display.

8-4-6. Invention D6
The gaming machine according to the invention D6
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions D1 to D5.
The effect control means is characterized in that, after performing the suggestion effect, neither the predetermined effect nor the effect different from the predetermined effect (normal figure variation effect) can be executed.

According to the invention D, the effect of producing the effect according to the variation display of the symbol is improved with respect to the problem D described next for the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-039887 as the prior art document. It has the effect of doing. In the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-039887, when a game ball enters the starting port, a variable display of a special symbol is performed. In the variable display of the special symbol, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result after the variable display of the special symbol, a special game with the opening of the big winning opening is executed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the winning gate, a variable display of a normal symbol is performed. In the variable display of the normal symbol, when the hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result after the variable display of the normal symbol, the auxiliary game accompanied by the opening of the variable second starting port, which is the starting port, is executed. Here, when the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, the special symbol lottery effect including the variable display of the effect symbol is performed in the display area of the image display device 7. Then, for example, if the variable display of the normal symbol is started while the special figure lottery effect is being performed, the normal pattern effect may be started. When the normal drawing effect is started, the box B appears in the display area of the image display device 7 on which the special drawing lottery effect is performed. Then, in the box B, the reels L with a plurality of types of special effect symbols rotate, and stop after a predetermined time has elapsed. At this time, the special effect symbol appearing from the box B suggests a predetermined item (an auxiliary game having a long opening time is executed and a jackpot expectation degree). Although the game entertainment is improved by performing such a general drawing production, the general drawing production is always started when the box B appears. Therefore, it is easily understood by the player that the normal drawing effect is executed when the box B appears. Therefore, the subject D is to provide a new game machine in which the effect of producing the effect according to the variable display of the symbol is improved. Then, the invention D1 responds to the problem D by saying, "If the second condition is satisfied while the first symbol is variablely displayed, the effect control means does not execute the predetermined effect after performing the suggestion effect. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect according to the variable display of the second symbol based on the establishment of the second condition. ”By the configuration not provided in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-039887, the variable display of the symbol can be achieved. It has an advantageous effect that the production effect of the corresponding production can be improved.

8-5-1. Invention E1
The gaming machine according to the invention E1
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (the game ball passes through the gate 28), the symbol (ordinary symbol) is variably displayed, and when a specific display result (winning symbol A) is derived by the variable display of the symbol, the symbol is closed. A gaming machine capable of performing an auxiliary game accompanied by the open state of a variable starting region (second starting port 22) that can take a state and an open state.
Based on the fact that the game ball passes through the variable start area when the auxiliary game is being executed, the predetermined effect (the latter half of the challenge effect to V and the joint effect during the fluctuation of special figure 1) to be executed after the passage is performed. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with an effect control means (effect control board 90) capable of executing a specific connection effect (connecting effect during an auxiliary game).

8-5-2. Invention E2
The gaming machine according to the invention E2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention E1.
When the game ball does not pass through the variable start area while the auxiliary game is being executed, the effect control means responds to the effect of not passing through the auxiliary game (electric chew). It is characterized by being able to execute non-winning effects).

8-5-3. Invention E3
The gaming machine according to the invention E3 is
A gaming machine according to Invention 1 or Invention E2.
In the auxiliary game, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect (electric chew firing promotion effect) that suggests that the variable start area is in the open state, and the game ball starts the variable start when the suggestion effect is executed. After passing through the region, the suggestion effect can be switched to the specific connection effect.

8-5-4. Invention E4
The gaming machine according to the invention E4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention E1 to Invention E3.
The effect control means is characterized in that the specific connecting effect is terminated with the start of the predetermined effect.

8-5-5. Invention E5
The gaming machine according to the invention E5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention E1 to Invention E4.
The predetermined effect is executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the variable start region when the auxiliary game is being executed, and the predetermined effect and the effect content of the specific connecting effect are related to each other. It is characterized by.

8-5-6. Invention E6
The gaming machine according to the invention E6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention E1 to Invention E5.
In addition to the variable starting area, a specific starting area (first starting port 20) is provided.
When the game ball passes through the specific starting area, the first symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed, and when the game ball passes through the variable starting area, the second symbol different from the first symbol is displayed. A symbol display control means (game control microcomputer 81 that performs steps S1502 to S1504) for variable display of (first special symbol) and
When a specific display result (big hit symbol or small hit symbol) is derived in the variable display of the first symbol or the variable display of the second symbol, a variable winning area (first large) that can be in a closed state or an open state is obtained. Special game control means (game control microcomputer 81 that performs steps S1505 to S1507) capable of executing the special game with the open state of the winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 32), and
The first hold storage means (special figure 1 hold storage unit 851) that stores the variable display of the first symbol that has not been started as hold information (special figure 1 hold), and
A second hold storage means (special figure 2 hold storage unit 852) for storing the variable display of the second symbol that has not been started as hold information (special figure 2 hold) is provided.
The symbol display control means can execute the variable display of the second symbol with priority over the variable display of the first symbol.
The effect control means
It is possible to execute the effect (the latter half of the challenge to V) according to the variable display of the second symbol.
When the variable display of the first symbol and the game ball pass through the variable start area when the auxiliary game is being executed, and the variable display of the first symbol is performed at the end of the auxiliary game, the said It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a special connecting effect (special drawing 1 changing connecting effect) that connects a specific connecting effect and an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second symbol.

8-5-7. Invention E7
The gaming machine according to the invention E7 is
A gaming machine according to invention E6.
When the game ball passes through the variable start area and the variable display of the second symbol is started when the auxiliary game is performed but the variable display of the first symbol is not performed, the effect control The means is characterized in that the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second symbol is performed without performing the specific connection effect and the special connection effect.

According to the invention E, there is an effect of improving the interest in the game with respect to the problem E described below for the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-139553 as the prior art document. In the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-139553, when the game ball enters the first start port, the first special symbol is variably displayed. In the variable display of the first special symbol, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result after the variable display of the first special symbol, a special game accompanied by opening the big winning opening is executed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the winning gate, a variable display of a normal symbol is performed. In the variable display of the normal symbol, when the hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result after the variable display of the normal symbol, the auxiliary game accompanied by the opening of the variable second starting port, which is the starting port, is executed. Here, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed, a special symbol lottery effect including the variable display of the effect symbol is performed in the display area of the image display device 7. Then, for example, if the variable display of the normal symbol is started while the special figure lottery effect is being performed, the normal pattern effect may be started. The normal drawing effect is performed together with the special drawing lottery effect in the display area of the image display device 7. In the normal drawing effect, when a specific symbol is stopped as a result of the normal drawing effect, an auxiliary game with a long opening time of the second starting port is executed. During this auxiliary game, a long opening effect is performed together with a special drawing lottery effect in the display area of the image display device 7. The long opening effect is a long opening notice effect that announces the long opening before the long opening of the second starting port is performed, and a long opening effect is being performed between the long opening and the end of the auxiliary game. It is composed of a long open production that suggests that there is something. In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting port during this auxiliary game, the second special figure holding effect suggesting that the ball has entered the second starting port and the entry into the second starting port are performed. Each of the long-opening middle-winning productions, which represents the number of prize balls for each ball, is performed separately from the long-opening production. Then, when the long opening effect is completed with the end of the auxiliary game, a special effect with a background image different from the previous one is performed. However, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game with respect to a game machine capable of performing an auxiliary game accompanied by opening a variable starting area such as the second starting port. Therefore, the subject E is to provide a new game machine that enhances the game entertainment. Then, according to the invention E1, "until the predetermined effect executed after the passage is executed based on the game ball passing through the variable start region when the auxiliary game is being executed" for the task E. The configuration that the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-139553 does not have, which means that it is provided with an effect control means capable of executing a specific connecting effect that connects the spaces, has an advantageous effect that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

8-6-1. Invention F1
The gaming machine according to the invention F1
A variable starting region (second starting port 22) that can have a closed mode and an open mode, and
A game state control means (main control board 80) that can be controlled in a normal game state or a specific game state (time saving state) in which the variable starting region tends to be in the open mode.
A symbol display control means (main control board 80) capable of executing variable display of symbols by passing the game ball through the variable start region, and
When a predetermined fixed time elapses after a specific symbol (small hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display control means, a specific game (small hit game) advantageous to the player is performed. It is equipped with a specific game control means (main control board 80) that can be executed.
The symbol display control means is characterized in that the determination time related to the specific symbol can be made longer in the normal gaming state than in the specific gaming state.

8-6-2. Invention F2
The gaming machine according to the invention F2
A gaming machine according to the invention F1.
A variable winning area (second large winning opening 32) that can be in a closed state and an open state is provided.
The specific game is accompanied by the open state of the variable winning region.
In the normal game state, the notification control means for notifying that the game ball is launched toward the variable winning area from the time when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed until the predetermined fixed time elapses. (Sub-control board 90 for performing VAT launch promotion effect), and the like.

8-6-3. Invention F3
The gaming machine according to the invention F3
A gaming machine according to the invention F2.
When the game ball that has passed through the variable winning area in the specific game passes through the specific area (specific area 34), the game state control means can be controlled in the specific game state after the specific game, and the specific game can be controlled. If the game ball does not pass through the specific area, it is not controlled in the specific game state after the specific game.

8-6-4. Invention F4
The gaming machine according to the invention F4 is
A gaming machine according to the invention F3.
Equipped with a launching device (launching device 112) capable of launching a game ball according to the launching operation of the player
In addition to the variable starting area, a specific starting area (first starting port 20) is provided.
The symbols include a first symbol (special figure 1) and a second symbol (special figure 2).
The symbol display control means
When the game ball passes through the specific starting area, the variable display of the first symbol can be executed.
When the game ball passes through the variable starting area, the variable display of the second symbol can be executed.
The specific game control means can execute the specific game when the specific second symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the second symbol.
In the normal gaming state, the specific starting area is easier to pass the game ball than the variable starting area, and in the specific gaming state, the variable starting area is made to pass the game ball more than the specific starting area. Easy,
The specific starting area and the variable winning area are arranged at positions that can be separated by different firing operations.
The variable winning region is characterized in that it is arranged at a position where it is not easy to pass through the variable winning region even if the game ball is launched after the specific game is started.

8-6-5. Invention F5
The gaming machine according to the invention F5
A gaming machine according to any one of the inventions F1 to F4.
A variable winning area (second large winning opening 32) that can be in a closed state and an open state is provided.
The specific symbol includes a first symbol (small hit symbol) and a second symbol (big hit symbol).
The specific game includes a first specific game (small hit game) accompanied by the open state of the variable winning area and a second specific game (big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific game. ,
The specific game control means
When the first fixed time elapses after the first symbol (small hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display control means, the first specific game can be executed. 1 Specific game control means and
When the second fixed time elapses after the second symbol (small hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display control means, the second specific game can be executed. Has 2 specific game control means,
When the game ball that has passed through the variable winning area in the first specific game passes through the specific area (specific area 34), the second specific game control means plays the second specific game after the first specific game. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area in the first specific game, the second specific game is not executed after the first specific game.
In the normal gaming state, the specific time related to the first symbol is longer than the fixed time related to the second symbol.

According to the invention F, there is an effect of improving the interest in the game with respect to the problem F described below for the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159147 as the prior art document. In the game machine described in JP-A-2016-159147, when the game ball passes through the winning gate, a variable display of a normal symbol is performed. In the variable display of the normal symbol, the stop display is performed as the display result after the variable display of the normal symbol. Here, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game accompanied by the opening of the variable second starting port is executed. Then, when the game ball enters the second starting port, the special symbol is variably displayed. In the variable display of the special symbol, the stop display is performed as a display result after the variable display of the special symbol. Here, when the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, a special game accompanied by opening the big winning opening is executed. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159147, the game is further controlled in a normal gaming state (low base state) or a time-saving gaming state (high base state) in which the second starting port is easier to open than in the normal gaming state. Will be done. The time required for the stop display of the special symbol is set to be the same in the normal game state and the time-saving game state. However, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game with respect to the game machine which can be controlled in the time-saving game state where the variable start area such as the second start port is easily opened. Therefore, the subject F is to provide a new game machine that enhances the game entertainment. The invention F1 states that, in response to the problem F, "the symbol display control means performs a stop display of a specific symbol for a longer time in a normal gaming state than in a specific gaming state", according to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-159147. The configuration that the game machine described in the publication does not have has an advantageous effect that can improve the game entertainment.

1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 7 ... Image display device 7a ... Display unit 20 ... 1st starting port 22 ... 2nd starting port 23 ... Electric chew 32 ... 2nd big winning opening 33 ... 2nd big winning device 34 ... Specific area 36 ... Distribution device 80 ... Main control board 81 ... Game control microcomputer 82 ... CPU
83 ... ROM
84 ... RAM
91 ... Microcomputer for production control 92 ... CPU
93 ... ROM
94 ... RAM
100 ... Image control board

Claims (1)

A first starting area and a second starting area that can be in a closed state and an open state are provided.
The variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first starting area, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the second starting area. Game control means to play
A gaming state control means capable of controlling a normal state and a specific state in which the second starting region is more likely to take the open state than the normal state.
A gaming machine equipped with an effect control means capable of executing a predetermined effect.
The game control means executes variable display of a normal symbol when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when a specific display result is derived from the variable display of the normal symbol, the auxiliary with the open state of the second starting region. Playing a game
The effect control means
A predetermined effect can be executed on condition that the game ball passes through the second starting region when the auxiliary game is being executed.
In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the second starting region while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, a special effect different from the predetermined effect is executed according to the passage. When the game ball passes through the second starting region when the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed while the predetermined effect is executed after the special effect is completed, the predetermined effect is executed according to the passage. the execution,
In the specific state, even if the game ball passes through the second starting region while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the special effect is not executed according to the passage. A game machine to play.